PIC16LC782-I/SO

PIC16C781.book Page 1 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers with A/D, D/A, OPAMP, Comparators and PSMC Microcontroller Core Features: Microcontroller Core Features (Continued): • High performance RISC CPU • Only 35 single word instructions to learn • All single cycle instructions except for program branches which are two cycle • Direct, indirect and relative addressing modes - Operating speed: DC - 20 MHz clock input DC - 200 ns instruction cycle • Low power, high speed CMOS EPROM technology • Fully static design • Low power consumption: - < 2 mA @ 5V, 4 MHz - < 1 A typical standby current. Data Memory X8 PIC16C781 1K 128 PIC16C782 2K 128 Pin Diagram PDIP, Windowed CERDIP, SOIC, SSOP • 8-level deep hardware stack • Interrupt capability (up to 8 internal/external interrupt sources) • 16 I/O pins: - Individual direction control (13 pins) - Input only (3 pins), low leakage (2 pins) - Digital/Analog inputs (8 pins) • Programmable PORTB interrupt-on-change (8 pins) • Programmable PORTB weak pull-ups (8 pins) • Power-on Reset (POR) • Power-up Timer (PWRT) and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) • Watchdog Timer (WDT) with a software enabled option and its own on-chip RC oscillator for reliable operation • Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Programmable Low Voltage Detection (LVD) • Internal/external MCLR • Programmable code protection • Power saving SLEEP mode • Selectable oscillator options: HS, XT, LP, EC, RC, INTRC (4 MHz/37 kHz) • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ISCP™) • Program Memory Read (PMR) capability • Four user programmable ID locations • Wide operating voltage range: - 2.5V to 5.5V for commercial and industrial temperature ranges - Extended temperature range available  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. RA0/AN0/OPA+ RA1/AN1/OPARA4/T0CKI RA5/MCLR/VPP VSS AVSS RA2/AN2/VREF2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 RB0/INT/AN4/VR RB1/AN5/VDAC •1 1 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 PIC16C781/782 Device Program Memory X14 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 RB3/AN7/OPA RB2/AN6 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI VDD AVDD RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G RB6/C1/PSMC1A RB5 RB4 Peripheral Features: • Timer0: 8-bit timer/counter with 8-bit prescaler • Enhanced Timer1: - 16-bit timer/counter with prescaler - External Gate Input mode - Option to use OSC1 and OSC2 in LP mode as Timer1 oscillator, if INTRC oscillator mode selected • Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC): - 8-bit resolution - Programmable 8-channel input - Internal voltages available for selfdiagnostics • Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC): - 8-bit resolution - Reference from AVDD, VREF1, or VR module - Output configurable to VDAC pin, Comparators, and ADC reference • Operational Amplifier module (OPA): - Firmware initiated input offset voltage Auto Calibration module - Low leakage inputs - Programmable Gain Bandwidth Product (GBWP) Preliminary DS41171B-page 1 PIC16C781.book Page 2 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 Peripheral Features (Continued): • Programmable Switch Mode Controller module: - PWM and PSM modes - Programmable switching frequency - Configurable for either single or dual feedback inputs - Configurable single or dual outputs - Slope compensation output available in single output mode • Dual Analog Comparator module with: - Individual enable and interrupt bits - Programmable speed and output polarity - Fully configurable inputs and outputs - Reference from DAC, or VREF1/VREF2 - Low input offset voltage. • VR voltage reference module: - 3.072V +/- 0.7% @25C, AVDD = 5V - Configurable output to ADC reference, DAC reference, and VR pin - 5 mA sink/source Key Features PIC® Mid-Range Reference Manual (DS33023) Operating Frequency RESETS (and Delays) PIC16C781 PIC16C782 DC - 20 MHz DC - 20 MHZ POR, BOR, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) POR, BOR, MCLR, WDT (PWRT, OST) Program Memory (14 bit words) 1K 2K Data Memory (bytes) 128 128 Interrupts 8 8 I/O Ports 13 + 3 Input only 13 + 3 Input only Timers 2 2 Programmable Switch Mode Controller 1 1 8-bit Analog-to-Digital Module 1 1 8 External, 2 Internal 8 External, 2 Internal 8-bit Digital-to-Analog Module 1 1 Comparators 2 2 4 (AN) 4 (AN) ADC channels Comparator Channels Operational Amplifier 1 1 Voltage Reference 1 1 Brown-out Reset Yes Yes Programmable Low Voltage Detect Yes Yes Instruction Set 35 Instructions 35 Instructions DS41171B-page 2 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 3 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview ......................................................................................................................................................................... 5 2.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................ 11 3.0 I/O Ports .................................................................................................................................................................................... 25 4.0 Program Memory Read (PMR) .................................................................................................................................................. 47 5.0 Timer0 Module .......................................................................................................................................................................... 51 6.0 Timer1 Module with Gate Control .............................................................................................................................................. 55 7.0 Voltage Reference Module (VR) ................................................................................................................................................ 61 8.0 Programmable Low Voltage Detect Module (PLVD) ................................................................................................................. 63 9.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module ............................................................................................................................... 69 10.0 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module ............................................................................................................................... 79 11.0 Operational Amplifier (OPA) Module ......................................................................................................................................... 83 12.0 Comparator Module ................................................................................................................................................................... 89 13.0 Programmable Switch Mode Controller (PSMC) ....................................................................................................................... 99 14.0 Special Features of The CPU .................................................................................................................................................. 117 15.0 Instruction Set Summary ......................................................................................................................................................... 133 16.0 Development Support .............................................................................................................................................................. 141 17.0 Electrical Characteristics ......................................................................................................................................................... 147 18.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables ...................................................................................................................... 167 19.0 Packaging Information ............................................................................................................................................................. 169 Index .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 175 On-Line Support................................................................................................................................................................................. 181 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 182 PIC16C781/782 Product Identification System .................................................................................................................................. 183 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@mail.microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) • The Microchip Corporate Literature Center; U.S. FAX: (480) 792-7277 When contacting a sales office or the literature center, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com/cn to receive the most current information on all of our products.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 3 PIC16C781.book Page 4 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 4 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 5 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW manual is highly recommended reading for a better understanding of the device architecture and operation of the peripheral modules. This document contains device-specific information. Additional information may be found in the PIC MidRange Reference Manual (DS33023), which may be obtained from your local Microchip Sales Representative or downloaded from the Microchip website. The Reference manual should be considered a complementary document to this data sheet. The Reference FIGURE 1-1: This data sheet covers two devices: PIC16C781 and PIC16C782. Both devices come in a variety of 20-pin packages. The following figures are block diagrams of the PIC16C781 and the PIC16C782. PIC16C781 BLOCK DIAGRAM 13 8 Data Bus Program Counter EPROM PORTA RA0/AN0/OPA+ RA1/AN1/OPARA2/AN2/VREF2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 RA4/T0CKI RA5/MCLR/VPP RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Program Memory RAM 8 Level Stack (13-bit) 1K x 14 File Registers 128 x 8 RAM 9 Addr Program Memory Read (PMR) Program 14 Bus Addr MUX Instruction reg PORTB 7 Direct Addr 8 Indirect Addr FSR reg STATUS reg 8 3 Power-up Timer OSC1/ CLKIN Instruction Decode & Control Timing Generation Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer Internal RC Oscillator INTRC Timer0 (TMR0) ALU Comparator (C1) Programmable Switch Mode Controller (PSMC) AVDD, AVSS(1) 8 VDD, VSS W reg Brown-out Reset OSC2/ CLKOUT MUX RB0/INT/AN4/VR RB1/AN5/VDAC RB2/AN6 RB3/AN7/OPA RB4 RB5 RB6/C1/PSMC1A RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G Timer1 (TMR1) Voltage Reference (VR) Module Comparator (C2) 8-bit ADC OPAMP (OPA) 8-bit DAC Programmable Low Voltage Detect (PLVD) Note 1: AVDD and AVSS pins are used by the following modules: C1, C2, OPA, DAC, ADC, and VR.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 5 PIC16C781.book Page 6 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 1-2: PIC16C782 BLOCK DIAGRAM 13 Program Memory RA0/AN0/OPA+ RA1/AN1/OPARA2/AN2/VREF2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 RA4/T0CKI RA5/MCLR/VPP RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI RA7/OSC1/CLKIN File Registers 128 x 8 RAM 9 Addr Program Memory Read (PMR) Program 14 Bus Addr MUX Instruction reg 7 Direct Addr 8 Indirect Addr FSR reg STATUS reg 8 3 Power-up Timer OSC1/ CLKIN Instruction Decode & Control Timing Generation OSC2/ CLKOUT Internal RC Oscillator INTRC Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer Brown-out Reset MUX ALU Comparator C1 Programmable Switch Mode Controller PSMC PORTB RB0/INT/AN4/VR RB1/AN5/VDAC RB2/AN6 RB3/AN7/OPA RB4 RB5 RB6/C1/PSMC1A RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G AVSS, AVSS(1) 8 VDD, VSS W reg Timer1 (TMR1) Voltage Reference Module (VR) Timer0 TMR0 PORTA RAM 8 Level Stack (13-bit) 2K x 14 8 Data Bus Program Counter EPROM Comparator C2 8-bit ADC OPAMP OPA 8-bit DAC Programmable Low Voltage Detect PLVD Note 1: AVDD and AVSS pins are used for the following modules: C1, C2, OPA, DAC, ADC, and VR. DS41171B-page 6 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 7 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 ANALOG SIGNAL MULTIPLEXING DIAGRAM OPAON CMPEN GBWP OPA RA0/AN0/OPA+ 0 RA1/AN1/OPA- 1 RA2/AN2/VREF2 2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 3 RB0/INT/AN4/VR 4 RB1/AN5/VDAC 5 RB2/AN6 6 VCFG CHS AVDD 3 VREF1 0 1 VR 2 VDAC 3 ADCREF ADC ADON GO/DONE 7 EN RB3/AN7/OPA VROE & VREN CHS3 VR AN4 VR REFERENCE 0 EN VDAC 8 ADRES FIGURE 1-3: 1 VREN 2 AN4 CHS0 C1CH 0 AN5 C1SP 2 AN7 C1POL C1OUT 3 C1R VREF1 1 2 AN4 0 AN5 1 AN6 2 AN7 3 2 3 C2OUT C2R C2 DAON & DAOE AN4 DAC REGISTER N/C 1 C2POL 1 DARS VR RB7/C2 PSMC1B C2ON 0 VDAC 0 C2OE C2CH C2SP VREF2 VREF1 C1 0 VDAC 2 RB6/C1/ PSMC1A C1ON 1 AN6 AVDD C1OE DACREF DAC 8 VDAC DAON  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 7 PIC16C781.book Page 8 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 1-1: PIC16C781/782 PINOUT DESCRIPTION Name RA0/AN0/OPA+ RA1/AN1/OPA- RA2/AN2/VREF2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 RA4/T0CKI RA5/MCLR/VPP RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI RA7/OSC1/CLKIN RB0/INT/AN4/VR RB1/AN5/VDAC RB2/AN6 RB3/AN7/OPA Input Type Output Type RA0 ST N/A Port Input AN0 AN — ADC Input OPA+ AN — OPAMP Non-inverting Input RA1 ST N/A Port Input AN1 AN — ADC Input OPA- AN — RA2 ST CMOS Function AN2 AN — VREF2 AN — RA3 ST CMOS AN3 AN — VREF1 AN — RA4 ST OD TOCKI ST — RA5 ST N/A MCLR ST — Description OPAMP Inverting Input Bi-directional I/O ADC Input Comparator 2 Voltage Reference Input Bi-directional I/O ADC Input Comparator 1, ADC, DACREF Input Bi-directional I/O Timer0 Clock Input Port Input Master Clear Input VPP Power — RA6 ST CMOS Bi-directional I/O Programming Voltage OSC2 — XTAL Crystal/Resonator CLKOUT — CMOS Fosc/4 Output T1CKI ST — RA7 ST CMOS Timer1 Clock Input Bi-directional I/O OSC1 XTAL — Crystal/Resonator CLKIN ST — External Clock Input RB0 TTL CMOS Bi-directional I/O INT ST — External Interrupt AN4 AN — VR — AN RB1 TTL CMOS AN5 AN — VDAC — AN RB2 TTL CMOS AN6 AN — RB3 TTL CMOS AN7 AN — ADC, Comparator Input Internal Voltage Reference Output Bi-directional I/O ADC, Comparator Input DAC Output Bi-directional I/O ADC, Comparator Input Bi-directional I/O ADC, Comparator Input OPA — AN OPAMP Output RB4 RB4 TTL CMOS Bi-directional I/O RB5 RB5 TTL CMOS Bi-directional I/O RB6 TTL CMOS Bi-directional I/O C1 — CMOS Comparator 1 Output PSMC1A — CMOS PSMC Output 1A RB6/C1/PSMC1A DS41171B-page 8 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 9 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 1-1: PIC16C781/782 PINOUT DESCRIPTION (CONTINUED) Function Input Type Output Type RB7 TTL CMOS Bi-directional I/O C2 — CMOS Comparator 2 Output PSMC1B — CMOS PSMC Output 1B T1G ST — Timer 1 Gate Input AVDD AVDD Power — Positive Supply for Analog AVSS AVSS Power — Ground Reference for Analog VDD VDD Power — Positive Supply for Logic and I/O pins VSS VSS Power — Ground Reference for Logic and I/O pins Legend: ST = Schmitt Trigger XTAL = Crystal AN = Analog CMOS = CMOS Output Name RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Description OD = open drain Power = Power Supply Preliminary TTL = Logic Level DS41171B-page 9 PIC16C781.book Page 10 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 10 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 11 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION FIGURE 2-2: PIC16C782 PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK There are two memory blocks in each of these PIC® microcontrollers. Each block (program and data memory) has its own bus, so that concurrent access can occur. PC Additional information on device memory may be found in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, (DS33023). 2.1 CALL, RETURN RETFIE, RETLW Program Memory Organization Stack Level 1 The PIC16C781/782 devices have a 13-bit program counter capable of addressing an 8K x 14 program memory space. The PIC16C781 has 1K x 14 words of program memory. The PIC16C782 has 2K x 14 words of program memory. Accessing a location above the physically implemented address causes a wraparound. Stack Level 2 Stack Level 8 The RESET vector is at 0000h and the interrupt vector is at 0004h. FIGURE 2-1: PIC16C781 PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK PC CALL, RETURN RETFIE, RETLW 13 On-Chip Program Memory RESET Vector 0000h Interrupt Vector 0004h 0005h Page 0 07FFh 0800h 13 Stack Level 1 Stack Level 2 1FFFh Stack Level 8 RESET Vector Interrupt Vector On-Chip Program Memory 0000h 0004h 0005h Page 0 03FFh 0400h 2.2 Data Memory Organization The data memory is partitioned into multiple banks, which contain the General Purpose Registers and the Special Function Registers. Bits RP0 and RP1 are bank select bits. RP1 RP0 (STATUS) = 00  Bank0 = 01  Bank1 = 10  Bank2 = 11  Bank3 1FFFh  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Each bank extends up to 7Fh (128 bytes). The lower locations of each bank are reserved for the Special Function Registers. Above the Special Function Registers are the General Purpose Registers, implemented as static RAM. All implemented banks contain Special Function Registers. Some frequently used Special Function Registers from one bank are mirrored in another bank for code reduction and quicker access. Preliminary DS41171B-page 11 PIC16C781.book Page 12 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 2-3: REGISTER FILE MAP File Address Indirect addr.(*) TMR0 PCL STATUS FSR PORTA PORTB PCLATH INTCON PIR1 TMR1L TMR1H T1CON ADRES ADCON0 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h 0Ah 0Bh 0Ch 0Dh 0Eh 0Fh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 1Ah 1Bh 1Ch 1Dh 1Eh 1Fh 20h General Purpose Register File Address Indirect addr.(*) 80h OPTION_REG 81h 82h PCL 83h STATUS 84h FSR 85h TRISA 86h TRISB 87h 88h 89h 8Ah PCLATH 8Bh INTCON PIE1 8Ch 8Dh 8Eh PCON 8Fh 90h 91h 92h 93h 94h 95h WPUB IOCB 96h 97h 98h 99h 9Ah 9Bh REFCON LVDCON 9Ch ANSEL 9Dh 9Eh 9Fh ADCON1 General Purpose Register 32 Bytes 96 Bytes accesses 70h-7Fh 7Fh Bank 0 File Address Indirect addr.(*) TMR0 PCL STATUS FSR PORTB PCLATH INTCON PMDATL PMADRL PMDATH PMADRH CALCON PSMCCON0 PSMCCON1 CM1CON0 CM2CON0 CM2CON1 OPACON DAC DACON0 A0h File Address 100h 101h 102h 103h 104h 105h 106h 107h 108h 109h 10Ah 10Bh 10Ch 10Dh 10Eh 10Fh 110h 111h 112h 113h 114h 115h 116h 117h 118h 119h 11Ah 11Bh 11Ch 11Dh 11Eh 11Fh Indirect addr.(*) 180h OPTION_REG 181h 182h PCL 183h STATUS 184h FSR 185h 186h TRISB 187h 188h 189h 18Ah PCLATH 18Bh INTCON 18Ch PMCON1 18Dh 18Eh 18Fh 190h 191h 192h 193h 194h 195h 196h 197h 198h 199h 19Ah 19Bh 19Ch 19Dh 19Eh 19Fh 120h 1A0h BFh EFh F0h accesses 70h-7Fh accesses 70h-7Fh 17Fh FFh Bank 2 Bank 1 170h 1F0h 1FFh Bank 3 Unimplemented data memory locations, read as '0'. * Not a physical register. DS41171B-page 12 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 13 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE 2.2.2 The Special Function Registers are registers used by the CPU and Peripheral Modules for controlling the desired operation of the device. These registers are implemented as static RAM. A list of these registers is given in Table 2-1. The register file can be accessed either directly, or indirectly, through the File Select Register (FSR). TABLE 2-1: Address SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS PIC16C781/782 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Details on Page: 23 Bank 0 00h(2) INDF Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) 0000 0000 01h TMR0 Timer0 Module’s Register xxxx xxxx 51 02h(2) PCL Program Counter's (PC) Least Significant Byte 0000 0000 23 03h(2) STATUS 0001 1xxx 17 04h(2) FSR xxxx xxxx 23 05h PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xxxx 0000 26 06h PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx 0000 35 07h — Unimplemented — — 08h — Unimplemented — — 09h — Unimplemented — — ---0 0000 23 0Ah(1, 2) PCLATH 0Bh(2) INTCON 0Ch PIR1 0Dh — 0Eh IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer — — — Write Buffer for the upper 5 bits of the Program Counter GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 19 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMR1IF 0000 ---0 21 Unimplemented TMR1L Holding register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register 0Fh TMR1H Holding register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register 10h T1CON — TMR1GE T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON — — xxxx xxxx 55 xxxx xxxx 55 -000 0000 57 11h — Unimplemented — — 12h — Unimplemented — — 13h — Unimplemented — — 14h — Unimplemented — — 15h — Unimplemented — — 16h — Unimplemented — — 17h — Unimplemented — — 18h — Unimplemented — — 19h — Unimplemented — — 1Ah — Unimplemented — — 1Bh — Unimplemented — — 1Ch — Unimplemented — — 1Dh — Unimplemented — — 1Eh ADRES xxxx xxxx 71 1Fh ADCON0 0000 0000 70 ADC Result Register ADCS1 ADCS0 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE CHS3 ADON Legend: Note x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. 1: The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. See Section 2.9 for more detail. 2: These registers can be addressed from any bank.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 13 PIC16C781.book Page 14 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 2-1: Address PIC16C781/782 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Details on Page: 0000 0000 23 Bank 1 80h(2) INDF 81h OPTION_REG 82h(2) PCL Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) RBPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 Program Counter's (PC) Least Significant Byte 1111 1111 18 0000 0000 23 0001 1xxx 17 83h(2) STATUS 84h(2) FSR Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer xxxx xxxx 23 85h TRISA PORTA Data Direction Register 1111 1111 26 86h TRISB PORTB Data Direction Register IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C 1111 1111 35 87h — Unimplemented — — 88h — Unimplemented — — 89h — Unimplemented — — ---0 0000 23 8Ah(1,2) PCLATH 8Bh(2) INTCON 8Ch PIE1 8Dh — 8Eh PCON — — — Write Buffer for the upper 5 bits of the Program Counter GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 19 LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMR1IE 0000 ---0 20 Unimplemented — — — WDTON OSCF — POR BOR   ---q 1-qq 22, 120 8Fh  Unimplemented — — 90h — Unimplemented — — 91h — Unimplemented — — 92h — Unimplemented — — 93h — Unimplemented — — 94h — Unimplemented — — 95h WPUB PORTB Weak Pull-up Control 1111 1111 36 96h IOCB PORTB Interrupt-on-Change Control 1111 0000 36 97h — Unimplemented — — 98h — Unimplemented — — 99h — Unimplemented — — 9Ah — Unimplemented — — ---- 00-- 61 9Bh REFCON 9Ch LVDCON 9Dh ANSEL 9Eh — 9Fh ADCON1 — — — — VREN VROE —  — — BGST LVDEN LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 Analog Channel Select Unimplemented — — VCFG1 VCFG0 — — — — --00 0101 66 1111 1111 25 — — --00 ---- 71 Legend: Note x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. See Section 2.9 for more detail. 2: These registers can be addressed from any bank. 1: DS41171B-page 14 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 15 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 2-1: Address PIC16C781/782 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Details on Page: 23 Bank 2 100h(2) INDF Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) 0000 0000 101h TMR0 Timer0 Module’s Register xxxx xxxx 51 102h(2) PCL Program Counter's (PC) Least Significant Byte 0000 0000 23 103h(2) STATUS 0001 1xxx 17 104h(2) FSR xxxx xxxx 23 IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 105h — 106h PORTB 107h — 108h — 109h — 10Ah(1,2) PCLATH Unimplemented — — xxxx 0000 35 Unimplemented — — Unimplemented — — Unimplemented — — ---0 0000 23 RB7 — RB6 — RB5 — RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 Write Buffer for the upper 5 bits of the Program Counter 10Bh(2) INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 19 10Ch PMDATL PMD7 PMD6 PMD5 PMD4 PMD3 PMD2 PMD1 PMD0 0000 0000 48 10Dh PMADRL PMA7 PMA6 PMA5 PMA4 PMA3 PMA2 PMA1 PMA0 xxxx xxxx 48 10Eh PMDATH — — PMD13 PMD12 PMD11 PMD10 PMD9 PMD8 --00 0000 47 10Fh PMADRH — — — Reserved Reserved PMA10 PMA9 PMA8 ---x xxxx 48 110h CALCON CAL CALERR CALREF — — — — — 000- ---- 85 111h PSMCCON0 SMCCL1 SMCCL0 MINDC1 MINDC0 MAXDC1 MAXDC0 DC1 DC0 0000 0000 104 112h PSMCCON1 SMCON S1BPOL — SCEN SMCOM PWM/PSM SMCCS 000- 0000 104 113h — Unimplemented — — 114h — Unimplemented — — 115h — Unimplemented — — 116h — Unimplemented — — 117h — Unimplemented — — 118h — Unimplemented — — C1CH0 0000 0000 91 119h CM1CON0 11Ah CM2CON0 11Bh CM2CON1 11Ch OPACON 11Dh — 11Eh DAC 11Fh DACON0 S1APOL C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 0000 0000 93 — — — — — C2SYNC 00-- ---0 94 — — — — — GBWP 00-- ---0 84 MC1OUT MC2OUT OPAON CMPEN Unimplemented — — DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 0000 0000 79 DAON DAOE — — — — DARS1 DARS0 00-- --00 79 Legend: Note x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. 1: The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. See Section 2.9 for more detail. 2: These registers can be addressed from any bank.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 15 PIC16C781.book Page 16 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 2-1: Address PIC16C781/782 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER SUMMARY (CONTINUED) Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Details on Page: 0000 0000 23 Bank 3 180h(2) INDF 181h OPTION_REG 182h(2) PCL 183h(2) STATUS 184h(2) FSR 185h Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 Program Counter's (PC) Least Significant Byte IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer — 186h RBPU TRISB Unimplemented PORTB Data Direction Register 1111 1111 18 0000 0000 23 0001 1xxx 17 xxxx xxxx 23 — — 1111 1111 35 187h — Unimplemented — — 188h — Unimplemented — — 189h — Unimplemented — — ---0 0000 23 18Ah(1,2) PCLATH — — — Write Buffer for the upper 5 bits of the Program Counter 18Bh(2) INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 19 18Ch PMCON1 Reserved — — — — — — RD 1--- ---0 47 18Dh — Unimplemented — — 18Eh — Unimplemented — — 18Fh — Unimplemented — — 190h — Unimplemented — — 191h — Unimplemented — — 192h — Unimplemented — — 193h — Unimplemented — — 194h — Unimplemented — — 195h — Unimplemented — — 196h — Unimplemented — — 197h — Unimplemented — — 198h — Unimplemented — — 199h — Unimplemented — — 19Ah — Unimplemented — — 19Bh — Unimplemented — — 19Ch — Unimplemented — — 19Dh — Unimplemented — — 19Eh — Unimplemented — — 19Fh — Unimplemented — — Legend: Note x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. 1: The upper byte of the program counter is not directly accessible. PCLATH is a holding register for the PC whose contents are transferred to the upper byte of the program counter. See Section 2.9 for more detail. 2: These registers can be addressed from any bank. DS41171B-page 16 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 17 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.3 STATUS Register The STATUS register, shown in Register 2-1, contains the arithmetic status of the ALU, the RESET status and the bank select bits for data memory. The STATUS register can be the destination for any instruction, as with any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC, or C bits, the write to these three bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. The TO and PD bits are not writable. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as the destination may be different than intended. REGISTER 2-1: For example, CLRF STATUS clears the upper three bits and sets the Z bit. This leaves the STATUS register as 000u u1uu (where u = unchanged). It is recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register, since these instructions do not affect the Z, C, or DC bits from the STATUS register. For other instructions not affecting any status bits, see the "Instruction Set Summary." Note: The C and DC bits operate as a borrow and digit borrow bit, respectively, in subtraction. See the SUBLW and SUBWF instructions for examples. STATUS REGISTER (STATUS: 03h, 83h, 103h, 183h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R-1 R-1 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C bit7 bit0 bit 7 IRP: Register Bank Select bit (used for indirect addressing) 1 = Bank 2, 3 (100h - 1FFh) 0 = Bank 0, 1 (00h - FFh) bit 6-5 RP: Register Bank Select bits (used for direct addressing) 11 = Bank 3 (180h - 1FFh) 10 = Bank 2 (100h - 17Fh) 01 = Bank 1 (80h - FFh) 00 = Bank 0 (00h - 7Fh) Each bank is 128 bytes bit 4 TO: Time-out bit 1 = After power-up, CLRWDT instruction, or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 3 PD: Power-down bit 1 = After power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = By execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit carry/borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions) (for borrow, the polarity is reversed) 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions) 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred Note: For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low order bit of the source register. Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 17 PIC16C781.book Page 18 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.4 OPTION_REG Register Note: The OPTION_REG register is a readable and writable register which contains various control bits to configure: To achieve a 1:1 prescaler assignment for the TMR0 register, assign the prescaler to the Watchdog Timer. • TMR0 prescaler/WDT postscaler (single assignable register known also as the prescaler) • External INT interrupt • TMR0 • Weak pull-ups on PORTB REGISTER 2-2: OPTION REGISTER (OPTION_REG: 81h, 181h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 RBPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 bit7 bit0 bit 7 RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit(1) 1 = PORTB weak pull-ups are disabled 0 = PORTB weak pull-ups are enabled by the WPUB register bit 6 INTEDG: Interrupt Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge of RB0/INT pin 0 = Interrupt on falling edge of RB0/INT pin bit 5 T0CS: TMR0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on RA4/T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (FOSC/4) bit 4 T0SE: TMR0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on RA4/T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on RA4/T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = Prescaler is assigned to the WDT 0 = Prescaler is assigned to the Timer0 module bit 2-0 PS: Prescaler Rate Select bits Bit Value 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 TMR0 Rate 1:2 1:4 1:8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 1 : 256 WDT Rate 1:1 1:2 1:4 1:8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 Note 1: Individual weak pull-ups on RB pins can be enabled/disabled from the weak pull-up PORTB register (WPUB). Legend: DS41171B-page 18 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 19 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.5 INTCON Register Note: The INTCON register is a readable and writable register which contains: • Enable and interrupt flag bits for TMR0 register overflow • Enable and interrupt flag bits for the external interrupt (INT) • Enable and interrupt flag bits for PORTB Interrupt-on-Change (IOCB) • Peripheral interrupt enable bit • Global interrupt enable bit REGISTER 2-3: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit, or the global enable bit, GIE (INTCON). User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER (INTCON: 0Bh, 8Bh, 10Bh, 18Bh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-x GIE PEIE T01E INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 GIE: Global Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts bit 6 PEIE: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts bit 5 T0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR0 interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR0 interrupt bit 4 INTE: RB0/INT External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the RB0/INT external interrupt 0 = Disables the RB0/INT external interrupt bit 3 RBIE: RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the RB port change interrupt 0 = Disables the RB port change interrupt bit 2 T0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR0 register did not overflow bit 1 INTF: RB0/INT External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The RB0/INT external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The RB0/INT external interrupt did not occur bit 0 RBIF: RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1) 1 = When at least one of the RB7:RB0 pins changed state (must be cleared in software) 0 = None of the RB7:RB0 pins have changed state Note 1: Individual RB pin interrupt-on-change can be enabled/disabled from the Interrupton-Change PORTB register (IOCB). Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 19 PIC16C781.book Page 20 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.6 PIE1 Register Note: The PIE1 register contains the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 2-4: Bit PEIE (INTCON) must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt (see Register 2-3). PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER (PIE1: 8Ch) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMR1IE bit0 bit7 bit 7 LVDIE: Low Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit 1 = LVD interrupt is enabled 0 = LVD interrupt is disabled bit 6 ADIE: Analog-to-Digital Converter Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Analog-to-Digital Converter interrupt 0 = Disables the Analog-to-Digital Converter interrupt bit 5 C2IE: Comparator C2 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Comparator C2 interrupt 0 = Disables the Comparator C2 interrupt bit 4 C1IE: Comparator C1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Comparator C1 interrupt 0 = Disables the Comparator C1 interrupt bit 3-1 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 0 TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt Legend: DS41171B-page 20 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 21 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.7 PIR1 Register Note: This register contains the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. REGISTER 2-5: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit, or the global enable bit, GIE (INTCON). User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REGISTER (PIR1 0Ch) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMR1IF bit7 bit 0 bit 7 LVDIF: Low Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The supply voltage has fallen below the specified LVD voltage (must be cleared in software) 0 = The supply voltage is greater than the specified LVD voltage bit 6 ADIF: Analog-to-Digital Converter Interrupt Flag bit 1 = An ADC conversion completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The ADC conversion is not complete bit 5 C2IF: Comparator C2 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator C2 input has crossed the threshold (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator C2 input has not crossed the threshold bit 4 C1IF: Comparator C1 Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator C1 input has crossed the threshold (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator C1 input has not crossed the threshold bit 3-1 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 0 TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = TMR1 register did not overflow Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 21 PIC16C781.book Page 22 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.8 PCON Register The Power Control (PCON) register contains two flag bits to allow determination of the source of the most recent RESET: • Power-on Reset (POR) • External MCLR Reset • Power Supply Brown-out (BOR) Reset Typical Time Inactive Direction of Change Minimum 100 s 300 s 37 kHz4 MHz 1.25 s 3.25 s Note: The Power Control register also contains frequency select bits for the INTRC oscillator and the WDT software enable bit. Note: Maximum 4 MHz  37 kHz When changing the internal oscillator speed (i.e., the OSCF bit, INTRC mode), the processor will be inactive during the oscillator frequency change. BOR is unknown on Power-on Reset. It must then be set by the user and checked on subsequent RESETS to see if BOR is clear, indicating a brown-out has occurred. The BOR status bit is a don't care and is not necessarily predictable if the brown-out circuit is disabled (by clearing the BODEN bit in the Configuration word). REGISTER 2-6: POWER CONTROL REGISTER (PCON: 8Eh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-q R/W-1 U-0 R/W-q R/W-q — — — WDTON OSCF — POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 4 WDTON: WDT Software Enable bit If WDTE bit (Configuration Word ) = 1: This bit is not writable, always reads ‘1’ If WDTE bit (Configuration Word ) = 0: 1 = WDT is enabled 0 = WDT is disabled bit 3 OSCF: Oscillator Speed INTRC Mode bit 1 = 4 MHz typical 0 = 37 kHz typical All other oscillator modes (X = Ignored) bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = No Brown-out Reset occurred 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred Legend: q = Value depends on conditions DS41171B-page 22 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 23 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 2.9 PCL and PCLATH 2.11 INDF The program counter (PC) specifies the address of the instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 13-bits wide. The low byte is called the PCL register. This register is readable and writable. The high byte is called the PCH register. This register contains the PC bits and is not directly readable or writable. All updates to the PCH register occur through the PCLATH register. The INDF register is not a physical register. Addressing INDF actually addresses the register whose address is contained in the FSR register (FSR is a pointer). This is known as indirect addressing. 2.9.1 A simple program to clear RAM locations 20h-2Fh using indirect addressing is shown in Example 2-1. PROGRAM MEMORY PAGING PIC16C781/782 devices are capable of addressing a continuous 8K word block of program memory. The CALL and GOTO instructions provide only 11 bits of address to allow branching within any 2K program memory page. When performing a CALL or GOTO instruction, the upper 2 bits of the address are provided by PCLATH. When performing a CALL or GOTO instruction, the user must ensure that the page select bits are programmed so that the desired program memory page is addressed. A return instruction pops a PC address off the stack onto the PC register. Therefore, manipulation of the PCLATH bits is not required for the return instructions (which POPs the address from the stack). 2.10 Stack The stack allows a combination of up to 8 program calls and interrupts to occur. The stack contains the return address from this branch in program execution. Mid-range devices have an 8-level deep x 13-bit wide hardware stack. The stack space is not part of either program or data space and the stack pointer is not readable or writable. The PC is PUSHed onto the stack when a CALL instruction is executed, or an interrupt causes a branch. The stack is POPed in the event of a RETURN, RETLW, or a RETFIE instruction execution. PCLATH is not modified when the stack is PUSHed or POPed. Reading INDF itself, indirectly (FSR = 0), produces 00h. Writing to the INDF register indirectly results in a no operation (although STATUS bits may be affected). EXAMPLE 2-1: NEXT 0x20 FSR INDF FSR FSR,4 NEXT ;initialize pointer ; to RAM ;clear INDF register ;inc pointer ;all done? ;NO, clear next CONTINUE : ;YES, continue An effective 9-bit address is obtained by concatenating the 8-bit FSR register and the IRP bit (STATUS), as shown in Figure 2-5. FIGURE 2-4: LOADING OF PC IN DIFFERENT SITUATIONS PCH PCL 8 7 12 8 PCLATH 5 0 Instruction with PCL as Destination ALU PCLATH 12 After the stack has been PUSHed eight times, the ninth push overwrites the value that was stored from the first push. The tenth push overwrites the second push (and so on).  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. movlw movwf clrf incf btfss goto HOW TO CLEAR RAM USING INDIRECT ADDRESSING Preliminary PCL PCH 1110 0 8 7 GOTO, CALL PCLATH 2 11 Opcode PCLATH DS41171B-page 23 PIC16C781.book Page 24 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 2-5: DIRECT/INDIRECT ADDRESSING Direct Addressing RP1:RP0 6 Bank Select Indirect Addressing From Opcode 0 7 IRP FSR Register Bank Select Location Select 00 01 10 0 Location Select 11 00h 80h 100h 180h 7Fh FFh 17Fh 1FFh Data Memory(1) Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Note 1: For register file map detail, see Figure 2-3. 2.12 Effect of RESET on Core Registers Refer to Table 2-2 for the effect of a RESET operation on core registers. TABLE 2-2: Address EFFECT OF RESET ON CORE REGISTERS Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS(1) Bank 0 00h INDF Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) 0000 0000 0000 0000 02h PCL Program Counter’s (PC) Least Significant Byte 0000 0000 0000 0000 04h FSR Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0Ah PCLATH 0Ch — — — Write Buffer for the upper 5 bits of the Program Counter PIR1 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMR1IF 81h OPTION_REG RBPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 xxxx xxxx 1111 1111 83h STATUS IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C 0001 1xxx 000q quuu ---0 0000 ---0 0000 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 Bank 1 8Bh INTCON 8Ch PIE1 8Eh PCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 0000 000u LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMR1IE 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 — — — WDTON OSCF — POR BOR ---q 1-qq ---q 1-qq Legend: Note x = unknown, u = unchanged, q = value depends on condition, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded locations are unimplemented, read as ‘0’. 1: Other (non power-up) RESETS include external RESET through MCLR and Watchdog Timer Reset. DS41171B-page 24 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 25 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 3.0 I/O PORTS Most pins for the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate function for the peripheral features on the device. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. to prevent unnecessary current drawn from the power supply. The Analog Select register (ANSEL) allows the user to individually select the Digital/Analog mode on these pins. When the Analog mode is active, the port pin always reads as a logic 0. Additional information on I/O ports may be found in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual (DS33023) 3.1 Note 1: On a Power-on Reset, the ANSEL register configures these mixed signal pins as Analog mode: RA, RB. I/O Port Analog/Digital Mode 2: If a pin is configured as Analog mode, the pin always reads '0', even if the digital output is active. The PIC16C781/782 has two I/O ports: PORTA and PORTB. Some of these port pins are mixed signal (can be digital or analog). When an analog signal is present on a pin, the pin must be configured as an analog input REGISTER 3-1: ANALOG SELECT REGISTER (ANSEL: 9Dh) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 ANS7 ANS6 ANS5 ANS4 ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 bit 7 bit 7-0 bit 0 ANS: Select Analog Input Function on AN bits 1 = Analog input 0 = Digital I/O Note: Setting a pin to an analog input disables the digital input buffer. The corresponding TRIS bit should be set to input mode when using pins as analog inputs. Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 25 PIC16C781.book Page 26 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 3.2 PORTA and the TRISA Register EXAMPLE 3-1: PORTA is an 8-bit wide, bi-directional port with the exception of RA0, RA1 and RA5, which are inputs only. The corresponding data direction register is TRISA. Setting a TRISA bit (= 1) makes the corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., disables the digital output). Clearing a TRISA bit (= 0) makes the corresponding PORTA pin an output (i.e., disables the digital output). Reading the PORTA register reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it, writes to the port latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is then modified and written to the port data latch. ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* This code block will configure PORTA as follows RA digital outputs RA digital inputs RA analog inputs RB digital I/O Note 1: RB configured as digital I/O Note 2: RA availability depends on the oscillator selection BANKSEL CLRF BANKSEL MOVLW Pins RA are multiplexed with analog functions: MOVWF • Analog inputs AN to the A/D Converter. • VREF1 and VREF2 inputs to the comparators. • OPAMP inverting/non-inverting inputs. Note: MOVLW MOVWF When the analog peripherals are using any of these pins as analog input/output, the ANSEL register must have the proper value to individually select the Analog mode of the corresponding pins. Pins RA are multiplexed with digital functions: • Pin RA4 is multiplexed with the TMR0 module clock input. • Pin RA5 is multiplexed with the device RESET (MCLR) and programming input (VPP) function. • Pins RA6 and RA7 are multiplexed with the oscillator/clock I/O functions. RA6 can also be configured as the TMR1 clock input. PORTA has the following I/O characteristics: • RA0, RA1, and RA5 are input only. • RA4 is an open drain output. All other PORTA pins have full CMOS buffer outputs. • All PORTA pins have Schmitt trigger inputs. DS41171B-page 26 INITIALIZING PORTA 3.2.1 PORTA PORTA ; ; ; TRISA ; B’00001111’; ; TRISA ; ; B’00000011’; ; ANSEL ; ; Select Bank 0 Preset PORTA data reg Select Bank 1 Digital I/O config data Configure PORTA digital Analog I/O config data Configure PORTA analog TRISA, ANSEL, AND CONTROL PRECEDENCE The ANSEL and TRISA registers are the primary software controls for the configuration of PORTA pins. TRISA bits tri-state the output drivers of PORTA, and ANSEL register bits control the digital input buffers. It is important to program both registers when configuring a mixed signal port pin, as most peripherals cannot override the TRISA and ANSEL registers control. Even if a peripheral has the ability to override control of the TRISA and ANSEL registers, it is good programming practice to program both registers appropriately. There are specific cases in which the TRISA and ANSEL registers can be overridden by a peripheral or a configuration bit, see Figures 3-1 through 3-8 for details. Note: Preliminary Crystal (LP, XT and HS) oscillator configurations use pin RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/ T1CKI as OSC2. In these modes, setting or clearing TRISA will have no effect and the pin will read as a zero (0).  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 27 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA0/AN0/OPA+ PIN VDD RA0/AN0/OPA+ RD ANSEL VSS RD TRISA VSS Data Bus ANSEL Reg. Q D WR ANSEL CK Q Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA Analog Function Enable AN0/OPA+ (see Figure 1-3) ANSEL TRISA FUNCTION PORTA READ 0 x Digital In Pin 1 x Analog In 0  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 27 PIC16C781.book Page 28 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-2: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA1/AN1/OPA- PIN VDD RA1/AN1/OPA- RD ANSEL VSS RD TRISA VSS Data Bus ANSEL Reg. D WR ANSEL CK Q Q Data Reg. D Q EN RD PORTA Analog Function Enable AN1/OPA- (see Figure 1-3) DS41171B-page 28 ANSEL TRISA FUNCTION PORTA READ 0 x Digital In Pin 1 x Analog In 0 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 29 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-3: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA2/AN2/VREF2 PIN RD ANSEL Data Bus Data Reg. D Q VDD VDD WR PORTA CK Q P RA2/AN2/VREF2 TRIS Reg. D WR TRISA CK Q N Q VSS VSS RD TRISA ANSEL Reg. D WR ANSEL Q CK Q Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA Analog Function Enable AN2/VREF2 (see Figure 1-3) ANSEL TRISA FUNCTION PORTA READ 0 1 Digital In Pin 0 0 Digital Out Pin 1 x Analog In 0  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 29 PIC16C781.book Page 30 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-4: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA3/AN3/VREF1 PIN RD ANSEL Data Bus Data Reg. D Q VDD VDD WR PORTA CK Q RA3/AN3/VREF1 P TRIS Reg. D WR TRISA CK Q N Q VSS VSS RD TRISA ANSEL Reg. D WR ANSEL CK Q Q Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA Analog Function Enable AN3/VREF1 (see Figure 1-3) DS41171B-page 30 ANSEL TRISA FUNCTION PORTA READ 0 1 Digital In Pin 0 0 Digital Out Pin 1 x Analog In 0 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 31 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-5: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA4/T0CKI PIN Data Reg. Data Bus D WR PORTA Q CK Q RA4/T0CKI TRIS Reg. D WR TRISA CK Q N Q Vss Vss RD TRISA Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA TMR0 Clock Input TRISA PORTA FUNCTION PORTA READ 1 x Digital In Pin 0 0 0 Output Pin 0 1 Hi-Z Output Pin  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 31 PIC16C781.book Page 32 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-6: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA5/MCLR/VPP PIN MCLRE RA5/MCLR/VPP To MCLR Circuit MCLR Filter Program Mode HV Detect VSS Data Bus VSS RD TRISA Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA MCLRE(1) TRISA FUNCTION PORTA READ Internal x Digital In Pin External x MCLR 0 Note 1: See Configuration Word , Register 14-1. DS41171B-page 32 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 33 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-7: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI PIN (INTRC w/ CLKOUT) or (RC w/ CLKOUT) OSC1 CLKOUT (FOSC/4) Oscillator Circuit 1 FOSC(1) 0 VDD T1OSCEN RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI Data Reg. Data Bus D WR PORTA VDD Q CK VSS P Q (INTRC) or (RC) TRIS Reg. D Q WR TRISA CK (see Table) N (INTRC w/o CLKOUT) or (RC w/o CLKOUT) or (EC) Q (INTRC w/ CLKOUT) or (RC w/ CLKOUT) VSS RD TRISA Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA T1CKI OSC MODE(1) TMR1 OSCILLATOR PIN FUNCTION T1CKI LP, XT, HS N/A OSC2 N/A 0 RC, INTRC w/ CLKOUT N/A CLKOUT N/A 0 INTRC w/o CLKOUT Enabled OSC2 (TMR1) N/A 0 INTRC w/o CLKOUT Disabled Digital I/O Available Pin RC w/o CLKOUT N/A Digital I/O Available Pin EC N/A Digital I/O Available Pin N/A = Not Available w/ = with PORTA READ w/o = without Note 1: See Configuration Word FOSC, Register 14-1.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 33 PIC16C781.book Page 34 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-8: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RA7/OSC1/CLKIN PIN OSC2 Oscillator Circuit FOSC(1) T1OSCEN VDD To Chip Clock Drivers RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Data Reg. Data Bus D Q VDD EC Mode WR PORTA CK P Q TRIS Reg. D Q VSS N WR TRISA CK Q VSS (INTRC w/ CLKOUT) or (INTRC w/o CLKOUT) RD TRISA Data Reg. Q D EN RD PORTA OSC MODE(1) TMR1 OSCILLATOR PIN FUNCTION LP, XT, HS N/A OSC1 0 RC N/A OSC1 0 PORTA READ EC N/A CLKIN 0 INTRC Enabled OSC1 (TMR1) 0 INTRC Disabled Digital I/O Pin N/A = Not Available Note 1: See Configuration Word FOSC, Register 14-1. TABLE 3-1: Address 05h 85h 9Dh Legend: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 TRISA PORTA Data Direction Register 1111 1111 1111 1111 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 1111 1111 1111 1111 ANSEL AN7 x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA. DS41171B-page 34 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 35 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 3.3 PORTB and the TRISB Register PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bi-directional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISB. Setting a TRISB bit (= 1) makes the corresponding PORTB pin an input (i.e., puts the corresponding output driver into a Hi-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISB bit (= 0) makes the corresponding PORTB pin an output (i.e., puts the contents of the output latch on the selected pin. EXAMPLE 3-2: BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF PORTB PORTB ; ; ; TRISB ; B’11001111’ ; ; TRISB ; ; B’00000011’ ; ; ANSEL ; ; 3.3.1 Select Bank 0 Preset PORTB data reg. Select Bank 1 Digital I/O config data Configure PORTB digital Analog I/O config data Configure PORTB analog The RB0 pin can be configured as: • • • • The RB3 pin is multiplexed with two analog functions: ADC/Comparator Analog Input AN7, and the output of the OPA module. When the pin is used as analog I/O, the ANSEL register must have bit 7 set to select the Analog mode of the pin. Pins RB are multiplexed with the outputs of the two on-board comparators, the outputs of the PSMC module, and the clock gate input for Timer1. Note, when enabled, these peripherals override the PORTB data register; however, TRISB retains control of output drivers. Therefore, TRISB must be programmed appropriately for Comparator and PSMC outputs to operate. INITIALIZING PORTB ;* This code block will configure PORT B ;* as follows ;* RB analog inputs ;* RB digital inputs ;* RB digital inputs ;* RB digital inputs ;* RA digital I/O BANKSEL CLRF Pin RB2 is multiplexed with the analog function ADC/ Comparator Input AN6. When the pin is used as an analog input, the ANSEL register must have bit 6 to select the Analog mode for the pin. Digital I/O ADC/Comparator Analog Input (AN4) External Interrupt (INT) Voltage Reference Output (VR) When the pin is used as an analog I/O, the ANSEL register must have bit 4 set to configure the RB0 pin as an analog input. Pin RB1 is multiplexed with two analog functions: ADC/ Comparator Analog Input AN5, and the output of the DAC. When the pin is used as an analog I/O, the ANSEL register must have bit 5 set to configure the RB1 pin as an analog I/O. Each of the PORTB pins has an internal weak pull-up resistance, which can be individually enabled from the WPUB register. A single global enable bit, RBPU (OPTION_REG), can turn on/off all of the selected pull-ups. Clearing the RBPU bit (OPTION_REG) enables the weak pull-up resistors (see Register 3-2). The weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset. 3.3.2 PORTB INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE Each of the PORTB pins, if configured as input, has the ability to generate an interrupt-on-change. To enable the interrupt-on-change feature, the corresponding bit must be set in the IOCB register (see Register 3-3). The RBIE bit in the INTCON register functions as a global enable bit to turn on/off the interrupt-on-change feature. The selected inputs are compared to the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The ”mismatch” outputs are OR-ed together to generate the RB Port Change Interrupt with flag bit RBIF (INTCON). The IOCB interrupt can also awaken the device from SLEEP. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, must clear the interrupt in the following manner: a) b)  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PORTB WEAK PULL-UP Preliminary A read or write to PORTB. This copies the current state into the latch and ends the mismatch condition. Clear flag bit RBIF. DS41171B-page 35 PIC16C781.book Page 36 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 3-2: WEAK PULL-UP PORTB REGISTER (WPUB: 95h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 bit7 bit 7-0 bit0 WPUB: PORTB Weak Pull-Up Control bits 1 = Weak pull-up enabled for corresponding pin 0 = Weak pull-up disabled for corresponding pin Note 1: For the WPUB register setting to take effect, the RBPU bit in the OPTION_REG register must be cleared. 2: The weak pull-up device is automatically disabled if the pin is in output mode, i.e., (TRISB = 0) for corresponding pin. Legend: REGISTER 3-3: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE PORTB REGISTER (IOCB: 96h) R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 IOCB7 IOCB6 IOCB5 IOCB4 IOCB3 IOCB2 IOCB1 IOCB0 bit7 bit 7-0 bit0 IOCB: Interrupt-on-Change PORTB Control bits 1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled for corresponding pin 0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled for corresponding pin Note 1: The interrupt enable bits, GIE and RBIE in the INTCON register, must be set for individual interrupts to be recognized. Legend: 3.3.3 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared TRISB, ANSEL, AND CONTROL PRECEDENCE The ANSEL and TRISB registers are the primary controls for the configuration of PORTB pins. TRISB tristates the output drivers of PORTB, and the ANSEL register disables the input buffers. It is important to program both registers when configuring a port pin, since most peripherals do not have precedence over the TRISB and ANSEL registers’ control of the pin. Even if a peripheral has the ability to override the control of the TRISB and ANSEL registers, it is good practice to program both registers appropriately. DS41171B-page 36 x = Bit is unknown Note 1: Upon RESET, the ANSEL register configures the RB pins as analog inputs. Preliminary 2: When programmed as analog inputs, RB pins will read as ‘0’. 3: There are specific cases in which the functions of the TRISB and ANSEL registers can be overridden by a peripheral or configuration word (see Figure 3-9 through Figure 3-16 for details).  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 37 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-9: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB0/INT/AN4/VR PIN VREN VROE VR Output WPUB Reg. Data Bus WR WPUB D Q CK Q VDD RD WPUB RBPU P Weak Pull-up PORTB Reg. WR PORTB D Q CK Q VDD P TRIS Reg. WR TRISB D Q CK Q VDD RB0/INT/AN4/VR N VSS VSS RD TRISB ANSEL Reg. WR ANSEL D Q CK Q TTL RD ANSEL IOCB Reg. WR IOCB D Q CK Q Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins RD IOCB Q D EN Q1 D Q ENEN D Q3 EN RD PORTB INT Input Analog Function Enable AN4/VR VREN & VROE ANSEL TRISB FUNCTION PORTB READ 0 0 1 Digital In Pin 0 0 0 Digital Out Pin 0 1 x Analog In 0 1 x x Analog Out 0  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 37 PIC16C781.book Page 38 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-10: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB1/AN5/VDAC PIN DAON DAOE WPUB Reg. Data Bus WR WPUB D Q CK Q VDAC Output VDD RD WPUB RBPU P Weak Pull-up PORTB Reg. D WR PORTB CK Q VDD Q P TRIS Reg. D Q CK Q WR TRISB VDD RB1/AN5/VDAC N VSS VSS RD TRISB ANSEL Reg. WR ANSEL D Q CK Q TTL RD ANSEL IOCB Reg. WR IOCB D Q CK Q Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins D Q1 EN RD IOCB Q D Q EN EN D Q3 EN RD PORTB Analog Function Enable AN5/VDAC DAON & DAOE ANSEL TRISB FUNCTION PORTB READ 0 0 1 Digital In Pin 0 0 0 Digital Out Pin 0 1 x Analog In 0 1 x x Analog Out 0 DS41171B-page 38 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 39 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-11: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB2/AN6 PIN WPUB Reg. Data Bus D Q CK Q WR WPUB VDD RBPU P Weak Pull-up RD WPUB VDD PORTB Reg. D WR PORTB Q CK VDD P RB2/AN6 Q N TRIS Reg. D Q CK Q WR TRISB VSS VSS RD TRISB ANSEL Reg. D Q CK Q WR ANSEL RD ANSEL TTL IOCB Reg. D Q CK Q WR IOCB Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins D EN Q1 RD IOCB Q D ENEN Q D Q3 EN RD PORTB Analog Function Enable AN6 ANSEL TRISB FUNCTION PORTB READ 0 1 Digital In Pin 0 0 Digital Out Pin 1 x Analog In 0  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 39 PIC16C781.book Page 40 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-12: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB3/AN7/OPA PIN CAL_ACTIVE OPAON OPA Output WPUB Reg. Data Bus D Q CK Q VDD WR WPUB RBPU Weak P Pull-up RD WPUB VDD PORTB Reg. WR PORTB D Q CK Q VDD P RB3/AN7/OPA N TRIS Reg. WR TRISB D Q CK Q VSS VSS RD TRISB ANSEL Reg. WR ANSEL D Q CK Q RD ANSEL TTL IOCB Reg. WR IOCB D Q CK Q Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins RD IOCB Q D Q1 EN D EN EN Q RD PORTB D Q3 EN Analog Function Enable AN7/OPA OPA MODULE ANSEL ADC/C1/C2 INPUT FUNCTION PORTB READ 0 Digital Digital I/O Pin 1 Analog Analog In 0 0 1 Analog OPA Output 0 1 1 Analog HI-Z Calibration 0 OPAON CAL_ACTIVE 0 x 0 x 1 1 Analog HI-Z = No internal drive on pin (analog input) during calibration. DS41171B-page 40 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 41 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-13: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB4 PIN WPUB Reg. Data Bus D Q CK Q WR WPUB VDD RBPU P Weak Pull-up RD WPUB VDD PORTB Reg. D Q CK Q WR PORTB VDD P RB4 N TRIS Reg. WR TRISB D Q CK Q VSS VSS RD TRISB TTL RD IOCB IOCB Reg. D WR IOCB Q CK Q Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins Q D EN Q1 D EN EN Q RD PORTB D Q3 EN TRISB FUNCTION PORTB READ 0 Digital Out Pin 1 Digital In Pin  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 41 PIC16C781.book Page 42 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-14: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB5 PIN WPUB Reg. Data Bus WR WPUB D Q CK Q VDD RBPU P Weak Pull-up RD WPUB VDD PORTB Reg. D WR PORTB Q CK VDD P RB5 Q N TRIS Reg. WR TRISB D Q CK Q VSS VSS RD TRISB TTL RD IOCB IOCB Reg. WR IOCB D Q CK Q Set RBIF ... Q From other RB pins Q Q1 D ENEN RD PORTB DS41171B-page 42 D EN Q D Q3 EN TRISB FUNCTION 0 Digital Out PORTB READ Pin 1 Digital In Pin Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 43 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-15: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB6/C1/PSMC1A PIN C1OE SMCON PSMC1A C1OUT WPUB Reg. Data Bus WR WPUB D Q CK Q VDD RBPU P Weak Pull-up RD WPUB Data Reg. D Q VDD VDD WR PORTB CK P Q RB6/C1/PSMC1A TRIS Reg. D Q CK Q N VSS WR TRISB VSS RD TRISB TTL RD PORTB RD IOCB IOCB Reg. D Q CK Q WR IOCB Serial Programming Clock Q D Q1 EN Set RBIF Q From other RB pins D EN RD Port Q3 PSMC SMCON COMPARATOR C1OE PORTB TRISB x x 1 Digital In 0 0 0 Digital Out 0 1 0 C1OUT 1 x 0 PSMC1A  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary FUNCTION DS41171B-page 43 PIC16C781.book Page 44 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 3-16: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G PIN C2OE SCEN SMCOM SMCON RD WPUB VDD RBPU VDD P Weak Pull-up WPUB Reg. Data Bus D WR WPUB Q CK VSS Data Reg. WR PORTB RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G Q D Q CK Q TRIS Reg. D Q CK Q C2OUT VDD WR TRISB P PSMC1B N RD TRISB SC Switch VSS RD IOCB TTL RD PORTB IOCB Reg. WR IOCB D Q CK Q Serial Programming Data and Timer1 Gate D Q Q1 EN Set RBIF Q D From other RB pins RD Port Q3 EN PSMC MODULE SMCON SMCOM SCEN COMPARATOR C2OE PORTB TRISB FUNCTION x x x x 1 Digital In 0 x x 0 0 Digital Out 1 0 0 0 0 Digital Out 0 x x 1 0 C2OUT 1 0 0 1 0 C2OUT 1 0 1 x 0 Slope Compensation 1 1 x x 0 PSMC1B DS41171B-page 44 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 45 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 3-2: Address 06h 86h SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB Name PORTB TRISB OPTION_REG Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 PSA PS2 PS1 PORTB Data Direction Register RBPU 1111 1111 1111 1111 81h 95h WPUB PORTB Weak Pull-up Control 1111 1111 1111 1111 96h IOCB PORTB Interrupt-on-Change Control 1111 0000 1111 0000 INTEDG T0CS T0SE PS0 1111 1111 1111 1111 9Dh ANSEL AN7 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 1111 1111 1111 1111 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used by PORTB.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 45 PIC16C781.book Page 46 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 46 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 47 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 4.0 PROGRAM MEMORY READ (PMR) Program memory is readable during normal operation (full VDD range). It is read by indirect addressing through the following Special Function Registers: • • • • • PMCON1: Control PMDATH: Data High PMDATL: Data Low PMADRH: Address High PMADRL: Address Low 4.1 PMCON1 Register PMCON1 is the control register for program memory accesses. Control bit RD initiates a read operation. This bit cannot be cleared, only set, in software. It is cleared in hardware at completion of the read operation. When interfacing to the program memory block, the PMDATH and PMDATL registers form a 2-byte word, which holds the 14-bit data. The PMADRH and PMADRL registers form a 2-byte word, which holds the 12-bit address of the program memory location being accessed. Mid-range devices have up to 8K words of program EPROM with an address range from 0h to REGISTER 4-1: 3FFFh. When the device contains less memory than the full address range of the PMADRH:PMARDL registers, the Most Significant bits of the PMADRH register are ignored. 4.2 PMDATH and PMDATL Registers The PMDATH:PMDATL registers are loaded with the contents of program memory addressed by the PMADRH and PMADRL registers upon completion of a Program Memory Read command. PROGRAM MEMORY READ CONTROL REGISTER 1 (PMCON1: 18Ch) R-1 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/S-0 Reserved — — — — — — RD bit7 bit0 bit 7 Reserved: Read as ‘1’ bit 6-1 Unimplemented: Read as '0 bit 0 RD: Read Control bit 1 = Initiates a Program memory read (read takes 2 cycles, RD is cleared in hardware) 0 = Reserved Legend: S = Settable bit REGISTER 4-2: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PROGRAM MEMORY DATA HIGH (PMDATH: 10Eh) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — PMD13 PMD12 PMD11 PMD10 PMD9 PMD8 bit7 bit0 bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as '0 bit 5-0 PMD: Program Memory Data bits The value of the program memory word pointed to by PMADRH and PMADRL after a program memory read command. Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 47 PIC16C781.book Page 48 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 4-3: PROGRAM MEMORY DATA LOW (PMDATL: 10Ch) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 PMD7 PMD6 PMD5 PMD4 PMD3 PMD2 PMD1 PMD0 bit7 bit 7-0 bit0 PMD: Program Memory Data bits The value of the program memory word pointed to by PMADRH and PMADRL after a program memory read command. Legend: REGISTER 4-4: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PROGRAM MEMORY ADDRESS HIGH (PMADRH: 10Fh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x — — — Reserved Reserved PMA10 PMA9 PMA8 bit7 bit0 bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 4-3 Reserved: Read state is not guaranteed bit 2-0 PMA: PMR Address bits Legend: REGISTER 4-5: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown PROGRAM MEMORY ADDRESS LOW (PMADRL: 10Dh) R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x PMA7 PMA6 PMA5 PMA4 PMA3 PMA2 PMA1 PMA0 bit7 bit 7-0 bit0 PMA: PMR Address bits Legend: DS41171B-page 48 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 49 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 4.3 Reading the EPROM Program Memory in the following instructions. PMDATH and PMDATL registers hold this value until another read or until RESET. To read a program memory location, the user must write 2 bytes of the address to the PMADRH and PMADRL registers, then set control bit RD (PMCON1). Once the read control bit is set, the Program Memory Read (PMR) controller uses the second instruction cycle after to read the data. This causes the second instruction immediately following the “BSF PMCON1,RD” instruction to be ignored. The data is available, in the very next cycle, in the PMDATH and PMDATL registers. Therefore, it can be read as 2 bytes EXAMPLE 4-1: Note 1: Interrupts must be disabled during the time from setting PMCON1 (RD) to the second instruction thereafter. 2: The following instructions should not be used following the start of a PMR read cycle: CALL, GOTO, BTFSS, BTFSC, RETFIE, RETURN, SLEEP. OTP PROGRAM MEMORY READ ;* This code block will read 1 word of program ;* memory at the memory address: ;* PROG_ADDR_HI : PROG_ADDR_LO ;* data will be returned in the variables; ;* PROG_DATA_HI, PROG_DATA_LO BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF PMADRL PROG_ADDR_LO PMADRL PROG_ADDR_HI PMADRH ; Select Bank 2 ; ; Store LSB of address ; ; Store MSB of address BANKSEL CLEAR GIE BCF BSF NOP NOP BSF MOVF MOVWF MOVF MOVWF PMCON1 ; Select Bank 3 INTCON, GIE PMCON1,RD ; ; ; ; ; ; INTCON, GIE PMDATL,W PROG_DATA_LO PMDATH,W PROG_DATA_HI  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Turn off INTs Initiate read Executed (Fig 4-1) Ignored (Fig 4-1) Turn on INTs Get LSB of word ; Get MSB of word Preliminary DS41171B-page 49 PIC16C781.book Page 50 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 4.4 Program Memory Read With Code Protect Set When the device is code protected, the CPU can still perform the program memory read function. TABLE 4-1: Address SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PMR Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 10Ch PMDATL PMD7 PMD6 PMD5 PMD4 PMD3 PMD2 PMD1 PMD0 0000 0000 0000 0000 10Dh PMADRL PMA7 PMA6 PMA5 PMA4 PMA3 PMA2 PMA1 PMA0 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 10Eh PMDATH — — PMD13 PMD12 PMD11 PMD10 PMD9 PMD8 --00 0000 --00 0000 10Fh PMADRH — — — PMA10 PMA9 PMA8 ---x xxxx ---u uuuu 18Ch PMCON1 Reserved — — — — Reserved Reserved — — RD 1--- ---0 1--- ---0 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used by PMR. FIGURE 4-1: PROGRAM MEMORY READ CYCLE EXECUTION Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Program Memory ADDR PC INSTR(PC-1) Executed here PC+1 BSF PMCON1,RD Executed here PC+3 PC+3 PMADRH,PMADRL INSTR(PC+1) Executed here Forced NOP Executed here PC+4 PC+5 INSTR(PC+3) Executed here INSTR(PC+4) Executed here RD bit PMDATH PMDATL Register DS41171B-page 50 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 51 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 5.0 TIMER0 MODULE When an external clock input is used for Timer0, it must meet certain requirements. The requirements ensure the external clock can be synchronized with the internal system clock. Also, there is a delay in the actual incrementing of Timer0 after synchronization. The Timer0 module timer/counter has the following features: • • • • • • 8-bit timer/counter Readable and writable Internal or external clock select Edge select for external clock 8-bit software programmable prescaler Interrupt on overflow from FFh to 00h Additional information on external clock requirements is available in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, (DS33023). EXAMPLE 5-1: Figure 5-1 is a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module. Additional information on timer modules is available in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, (DS33023). 5.1 INITIALIZING TIMER0 ;* This code block will configure Timer0 ;* for Polling, internal clock & 1:16 ;* prescaler ;* ;* Wait for TMR0 overflow code included BANKSEL TMR0 ; Select Bank 0 CLRF TMR0 ; Clear Timer0 ; Register Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter. Programming Timer0 is via the OPTION register (see Register 2-2). OPTION_REG MOVLW MOVWF B’11000011’ OPTION_REG ; Select Bank 1 ; INT on L2H ; Internal clk, ; pscaler 1:16 ******************************************** ;* Wait for TMR0 overflow ;* T0_OVFL_WAIT TBFSS INTCON,T0IF ; Check for TMR0 ; overflow GOTO T0_OVFL_WAIT ; If clear, test ; again BCF INTCON,T0IF ; Clear interrupt Timer0 mode is selected by clearing/setting the bit T0CS (OPTION_REG). In Timer mode (T0CS = 0), the Timer0 module increments every instruction cycle (without prescaler). If the TMR0 register is written, the increment is inhibited for the following two instruction cycles. The user can work around this by writing an adjusted value to the TMR0 register. Counter mode is selected by setting bit T0CS (OPTION_REG). In Counter mode, Timer0 increments either on every rising, or falling edge of pin RA4/T0CKI. The incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source Edge Select bit T0SE (OPTION_REG). Clearing bit T0SE selects the rising edge, setting selects the falling edge. Restrictions on the external clock input are discussed below. FIGURE 5-1: BANKSEL TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM Data Bus FOSC/4 0 PSOUT 1 1 Programmable Prescaler RA4/T0CKI pin 0 8 Sync with Internal Clocks TMR0 PSOUT (2 TCY Delay) T0SE 3 PS PSA T0CS Set Interrupt Flag bit T0IF on Overflow Note 1: T0CS, T0SE, PSA, PS (OPTION_REG). 2: The prescaler is shared with Watchdog Timer (refer to Figure 5-2 for detailed block diagram).  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 51 PIC16C781.book Page 52 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 5.2 Prescaler 5.2.1 An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0 module, or as a postscaler for the Watchdog Timer, respectively (Figure 5-2). For simplicity, this counter is referred to as “prescaler” throughout this data sheet. Note: Note: 5.3 The PSA and PS bits (OPTION_REG) determine the prescaler assignment and prescale ratio. Clearing bit PSA assigns the prescaler to the Timer0 module. When the prescaler is assigned to the Timer0 module, prescale values of 1:2, 1:4, ..., 1:256 are selectable. Setting bit PSA assigns the prescaler to the Watchdog Timer (WDT). When the prescaler is assigned to the WDT, prescale values of 1:1, 1:2, ..., 1:128 are selectable. When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF TMR0, BSF TMR0, x....etc.) will clear the prescaler. When assigned to WDT, a CLRWDT instruction clears the prescaler along with the WDT. Note: The prescaler assignment is fully under software control, i.e., it can be changed “on-the-fly” during program execution. There is only one prescaler available which is mutually exclusively shared between the Timer0 module and the Watchdog Timer. Thus, a prescaler assignment for the Timer0 module means that there is no prescaler for the Watchdog Timer, and vice-versa. The prescaler is not readable or writable. SWITCHING PRESCALER ASSIGNMENT To avoid an unintended device RESET, a specific instruction sequence (shown in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, DS33023) must be executed when changing the prescaler assignment from Timer0 to the WDT. This sequence must be followed even if the WDT is disabled. Timer0 Interrupt The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h. This overflow sets bit T0IF (INTCON). The interrupt can be masked by clearing bit T0IE (INTCON). Bit T0IF must be cleared in software by the Timer0 module Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling this interrupt. The TMR0 interrupt cannot awaken the processor from SLEEP, since the timer is shut-off during SLEEP. 5.4 Effects of RESET A device RESET will program Timer0 for an external clock input on RA4/T0CKI, Hi-Low edge, and no prescaler. The TMR0 register is not cleared. Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is assigned to Timer0 clears the prescaler count, but does not change the prescaler assignment. DS41171B-page 52 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 53 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 5-2: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TIMER0/WDT PRESCALER Data Bus FOSC/4 8 0 1 RA4/T0CKI pin Sync with Internal Clocks 1 0 T0SE TMR0 reg (2 TCY Delay) T0CS Set Interrupt Flag bit T0IF on Overflow PSA 0 8-bit Prescaler 8 1 Watchdog Timer 8 - to - 1 MUX PS PSA WDT Enable bit 0 1 PSA WDT Time-out Note: T0CS, T0SE, PSA, PS are (OPTION_REG). TABLE 5-1: Address REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 Name 01h,101h TMR0 0Bh,8Bh, 10Bh,18Bh INTCON 81h,181h OPTION_REG Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Timer0 Register Value on all other RESETS xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu GIE ADIF T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000x 0000 000u RBPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 1111 1111 1111 1111 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used by Timer0.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 53 PIC16C781.book Page 54 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 54 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 55 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 6.0 TIMER1 MODULE WITH GATE CONTROL The Timer1 module timer/counter has the following features: • 16-bit timer/counter (two 8-bit registers:TMR1H and TMR1L) • Readable and writable (both registers) • Internal or external clock select • Interrupt on overflow from FFFFh to 0000h • External enable input (T1G pin with TMR1GE bit = 1) • Option for Timer1 to use LP oscillator if device is configured to use INTRC w/o CLKOUT Timer1 Control register (T1CON) is shown in Register 6-1. Figure 6-2 is a simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module. 6.1 Timer1 Operation Timer1 can operate in one of three modes: 1. 2. 3. EXAMPLE 6-1: ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* Wait for TMR1 overflow code included BANKSEL CLRF CLRF MOVLW MOVWF BSF TMR1L TMR1L TMR1H B’01000000’ T1CON T1CON,TMR1ON ; ; ; ; ; ; Select Bank 0 Clear TMR1 LSB Clear TMR1 MSB Gate, Ps 1:1 Int clk Enable timer ;******************************************** ;* Wait for TMR1 overflow T1_OVFL_WAIT BANKSEL PIR1 T1_WAIT TBFSS PIR1,TMR1IF GOTO T1_WAIT BCF 16-bit timer with prescaler. 16-bit synchronous counter. 16-bit asynchronous counter. TIMER1 INITIALIZATION This code block will configure Timer1 for Polling, Ext gate of int clk (Fosc/4), & 1:1 prescaler. PIR1,TMR1IF ; Select Bank 0 ; ; Overflow? ; If 0, again ; Clear flag In Timer mode, Timer1 is incremented on every instruction cycle. In Counter mode, Timer1 is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock input T1CKI (RA6/ OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI). In addition, the Counter mode clock can be synchronized to the microcontroller clock or run asynchronously. In Counter and Timer modes, the counter/timer clock can be gated by the T1G input. If an external clock oscillator is needed (and the microcontroller is using INTRC w/o CLKOUT), Timer1 can use the LP oscillator as a clock source. Note 1: In Counter mode, the counter increments on the rising edge of the clock.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 55 PIC16C781.book Page 56 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 6.2 Control Register T1CON Control and configuration of Timer1 is by means of the T1CON register shown in Register 6-1. T1CKPS determines the prescaler value for the timer. Available prescaler values are: T1CKPS Prescaler Value Timer1 is enabled by setting the TMR1ON bit (T1CON). Clearing TMR1ON stops the timer, but does not clear the Timer1 register. The TMR1CS bit (T1CON) determines the Timer mode. When TMR1CS is set, the timer is configured as a counter and receives its clock from RA6/OSC2/ CLKOUT/T1CKI. When cleared, the timer is configured as a timer and its clock is derived from FOSC/4. Bit 1 Bit 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 Note: The T1SYNC bit (T1CON) determines Timer1’s synchronization. If cleared, the timer clock is synchronized to the system clock. If set, the timer is asynchronous. The Timer1 clock gate function is enabled by setting the TMR1GE bit (T1CON). When TMR1GE is set, the T1G input will control the clock input to the timer/ counter. A low on the T1G input will cause Timer1 to increment at the clock rate, a high will hold the timer at its present value. 1:8 1:4 1:2 1:1 To use the LP oscillator as the Timer1 oscillator: 1. TMR1CS must be set. 2. T1OSCEN must be set. 3. The Configuration Word must select INTRC w/o CLKOUT. The T1OSCEN bit (T1CON) enables the LP oscillator as a clock source for Timer1. This mode is a replacement for the regular external oscillator. DS41171B-page 56 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 57 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 6-1: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER (T1CON: ADDRESS 10h) U-0 — R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 TMR1GE T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 R/W-0 T1OSCEN R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 6 TMR1GE: Timer1 Gate Enable bit If TMR1ON = 0: This bit is ignored If TMR1ON = 1: 1 = Timer1 is on if T1G pin is low 0 = Timer1 is on bit 5-4 T1CKPS: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits 11 = 1:8 Prescale value 10 = 1:4 Prescale value 01 = 1:2 Prescale value 00 = 1:1 Prescale value bit 3 T1OSCEN: LP Oscillator Enable Control bit If INTRC w/o CLKOUT is selected in the configuration word, oscillator is active: 1 = LP oscillator is enabled for Timer1 clock 0 = LP oscillator is off Else: This bit is ignored bit 2 T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit TMR1CS = 1: 1 = Do not synchronize external clock input 0 = Synchronize external clock input TMR1CS = 0: This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS = 0. bit 1 TMR1CS: Timer1 Clock Source Select bit 1 = External clock from pin RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI (on the rising edge) 0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4) bit 0 TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit 1 = Enables Timer1 0 = Stops Timer1 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 57 PIC16C781.book Page 58 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 6-1: TIMER1 INCREMENTING EDGE T1CKI = 1 when TMR1 Enabled T1CKI = 0 when TMR1 Enabled Note 1: Arrows indicate counter increments. 2: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge of the clock. FIGURE 6-2: TIMER1 ON THE PIC16C781/782 BLOCK DIAGRAM RB7/C2/ PSMC1B/T1G TMR1ON TMR1GE TMR1ON TMR1GE Set Flag bit TMR1IF on Overflow To C2 Comparator Module TMR1 Clock TMR1 Synchronized Clock Input 0 TMR1H TMR1L 1 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN RA6/OSC2/ CLKOUT/ T1CKI INTRC w/o CLKOUT Mode LP OSCILLATOR T1SYNC 1 FOSC/4 Internal Clock Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize det 0 2 T1CKPS SLEEP Input TMR1CS T1OSCEN LPEN DS41171B-page 58 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 59 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 6.3 Timer1 Oscillator for the PIC16C781/782 6.4 When the microcontroller is using INTRC w/o CLKOUT, Timer1 can enable and use the LP oscillator as the Timer1 oscillator. When enabled, Timer1 oscillator operation is solely controlled by the T1OSCEN bit. The oscillator will operate independently of the TMR1ON bit, allowing the programmer to start and stop the Timer/Counter using the TMR1ON bit. The oscillator will also operate during SLEEP, allowing continuous timekeeping with Timer1. The electrical requirements for the LP oscillator, when used as the Timer1 oscillator, are the same as when the oscillator is used in LP mode. Note: Address Note: 6.5 The oscillator requires a startup and stabilization time before use. Therefore, T1OSCEN should be set, and a suitable delay observed, prior to enabling Timer1 (see Section 14.2). TABLE 6-1: Name Timer1 Interrupt The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H and TMR1L) increments from 0000h to FFFFh and then rolls over to 0000h. When Timer1 rolls over, the TMR1IF bit (PIR1) is set. To enable an interrupt, the TMR1IE bit (PIE1), the GIE (INTCON) and the PEIE bit (INTCON) must be set prior to rollover. To clear the interrupt, the TMR1IF must be cleared by software prior to re-enabling interrupts. When enabling the Timer1 interrupt, the user should clear both TMR1 registers and the TMR1IF prior to enabling interrupts. Effects of RESET Only POR and BOR Resets clear T1CON, disabling Timer1. All other RESETS do not affect Timer1. SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF RBIF 0000 000X 0000 000u LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMRIF 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 PIE1 LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMRIE TMR1L Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 0Fh TMR1H Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 Register xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu 10h T1CON 0Bh INTCON 0Ch PIR1 8Ch 0Eh — 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 TMR1GE T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON -000 0000 -uuu uuuu Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used by Timer1.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 59 PIC16C781.book Page 60 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 60 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 61 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 7.0 VOLTAGE REFERENCE MODULE (VR) Setting the VREN flag (REFCON), enables the module. Following initial start-up, the module should be allowed to stabilize for best accuracy. See Section 17.0 for information concerning stabilization times and conditions. The Voltage Reference module provides an on-chip nominal 3.072V reference voltage for the following: • ADC converter • DAC converter • VR output on the RB0/INT/AN4/VR pin To route the reference voltage to the external RB0/INT/ AN4/VR pin, the VROE flag (REFCON) must be set. The source for the reference voltage comes from a bandgap reference. 7.1 Effects of RESET A device RESET clears the REFCON register, disabling the voltage reference. The control register for this module is the REFCON register shown in Register 7-1. 7.2 Note 1: If the VR module is to be used by the DAC, ADC, or VR output:, the VR module must be enabled using VREN (REFCON). Registers Associated with VR A summary of the registers associated with VR is shown in Table 7-1. 2: When VREN = 1 and VROE = 1, the output driver for RB0/INT/AN4/VR will be driven tri-state and the analog driver for the VR output will be enabled. A read of RB0 will return a ‘0’. REGISTER 7-1: VOLTAGE REFERENCE CONTROL REGISTER (REFCON: 9Bh) U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 — — — — VREN VROE — — bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 VREN: Voltage Reference Enable bit (VR = 3.072V nominal) 1 = VR reference is enabled 0 = VR reference is disabled bit 2 VROE: Voltage Reference Output Enable bit If VREN = 1: 1 = Enabled, VR voltage reference is output on RB0 0 = Voltage reference is not available externally If VREN = 0: This bit is ignored bit 1-0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ Legend: TABLE 7-1: Address 09Bh R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH VR Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 REFCON — — — — VREN VROE — —  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS ---- 00-- ---- 00-- DS41171B-page 61 PIC16C781.book Page 62 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 62 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 63 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 8.0 PROGRAMMABLE LOW VOLTAGE DETECT MODULE (PLVD) condition. The time between TA and TB is then available to the microcontroller for completing a ‘graceful’ powerdown before VDD falls below VB. The PLVD module monitors the VDD power supply of the microcontroller and signals the microcontroller whenever VDD drops below its trip voltage. The signal acts as an ‘early warning’ of power-down, allowing the microcontroller to finish any critical ‘housekeeping’ tasks prior to completing power-down. Figure 8-2 is a simplified block diagram for the PLVD module, showing the VDD resistor ladder, control register, and voltage comparator. Note: Figure 8-1 demonstrates a potential application of the PLVD module (typical battery operation). At time TA, the VDD supply voltage (VA) has fallen below the PLVD reference voltage. The PLVD voltage comparator then sets the LVDIF bit (PIR), indicating a low voltage FIGURE 8-1: For low power applications, current drain can be minimized by enabling the module only during regular polled testing. When not in use, the module is disabled by clearing the LVDEN bit (LVDCON), which also powers down the resistor ladder between VDD and Vss. TYPICAL LOW VOLTAGE DETECT APPLICATION Voltage VA VB Legend: VA = PLVD trip point VB = Minimum valid device operating voltage Time 8.1 TA TB Control Register The PLVD module is controlled via the LVDCON register shown in Register 8-1. To enable the module for testing, the LVDEN bit (LVDCON) must be set. This will enable the onboard voltage reference and connect the resistor ladder between VDD and Vss. Clearing LVDEN will disable the module and disconnect the resistor ladder from Vss.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. The trip voltage is set by programming the LVDL bit (LVDCON). The voltages available are listed in Register 8-1. Note that voltages below 2.5V and above 4.75V are not available and should not be used. The BGST bit (LVDCON) is a status bit indicating that the internal reference voltage bandgap has stabilized. No test should be performed until this bit is set. The low voltage output flag for the PLVD module is the LVDIF bit (PIR1). Preliminary DS41171B-page 63 PIC16C781.book Page 64 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 8.2 Operation enables this reference whenever it is enabled and provides a stability bit, BGST, to indicate when it has stabilized. The bandgap reference is also enabled by other modules within the PIC16C781/782 as part of their operation. Other modules using the bandgap include the following: The PLVD indicates a low voltage condition by setting the LVDIF bit in the PIR1 register. Once set by the PLVD module, the LVDIF bit will remain set until cleared by software. For proper indication of a low voltage condition, the user should clear this bit prior to testing. • VR module • BOR module • OPA calibration module To test for a low voltage condition, the PLVD module compares the divided output of VDD against an internal bandgap reference. The PLVD module automatically FIGURE 8-2: LOW VOLTAGE DETECT BLOCK DIAGRAM VDD 16 to 1 MUX PLVD Control Register LVDEN DS41171B-page 64 LVDIF Internally Generated Reference Voltage Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 65 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 If another module has enabled the bandgap, then the reference will be stable when the PLVD module is enabled and the BGST flag can be ignored. However, if the bandgap has not been previously enabled, the LVDIF bit will not be valid until the BGST bit is set (see Figure 8-3). Systems using the PLVD interrupt should not enable the interrupt until after the reference is stable to prevent spurious interrupts. 8.2.1 3. 4. 5. SETTING UP THE PLVD MODULE The following steps are needed to set up the PLVD Module: 1. 2. 6. Ensure that PLVD interrupts are disabled (the LVDIE bit is cleared, or the GIE bit is cleared). Enable the PLVD module (set the LVDEN bit in the LVDCON register). Wait for the PLVD module to stabilize (the BGST bit to become set). Clear the PLVD interrupt flag, which may have falsely become set until the PLVD module has stabilized (clear the LVDIF bit). Enable the PLVD interrupt (set the LVDIE and the GIE bits). Write the value to the LV3:LV0 bits (LVDCON register), which selects the desired PLVD Trip Point. FIGURE 8-3: LOW VOLTAGE DETECT WAVEFORMS CASE 1: LVDIF may not be set VDD . VLVD LVDIF Enable LVD Internally Generated Reference Stable LVDIF cleared in software CASE 2: VDD VLVD LVDIF Enable LVD Internally Generated Reference Stable LVDIF cleared in software Attempt to clear LVDIF in software but remains set as LVD condition still exists  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 65 PIC16C781.book Page 66 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 8-1: PROGRAMMABLE LOW VOLTAGE DETECT REGISTER (LVDCON: 9Ch) U-0 U-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-0 R/W-1 — — BGST LVDEN LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 5 BGST: Internal Reference Voltage Stable Flag bit 1 = Reference is stable 0 = Reference is not stable bit 4 LVDEN: Low Voltage Detect Power Enable bit 1 = Enables PLVD, powers up LVD circuit 0 = Disables PLVD, powers down LVD circuit. bit 3-0 LV: Low Voltage Detection Limit bits 1111 = Reserved 1110 = 4.5V typical 1101 = 4.2V typical 1100 = 4.0V typical 1011 = 3.8V typical 1010 = 3.6V typical 1001 = 3.5V typical 1000 = 3.3V typical 0111 = 3.0V typical 0110 = 2.8V typical 0101 = 2.7V typical 0100 = 2.5V typical 0011 = Below valid operating voltage 0010 = Below valid operating voltage 0001 = Below valid operating voltage 0000 = Below valid operating voltage Legend: DS41171B-page 66 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 67 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 Example 8-1 shows the configuration of the PLVD module and a sample polling routine to monitor for low voltage conditions. EXAMPLE 8-1: PLVD EXAMPLE ;************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the PLVD for polling ;* and set the trip point for 4.2 to 4.4 volts ;* Includes polling routine ;* BANKSEL BCF MOVLW MOVWF LVDCON PIE1,LVDIE B’00011101’ LVDCON ; Select Bank 1 ; Disable PLVD interrupt WRM_UP BTFSS GOTO BANKSEL BCF LVDCON,BGST WRM_UP PIR1 PIR1,LVDIF ; ; ; Select Bank 0 ; Clear PLVD interrupt flag ; Enable PLVD, 4.2-4.4V trip ;************************************************** ;* Test for PLVD trip BANKSEL BTFSC GOTO 8.3 PIR1 PIR1,LVDIF LO_V_DET ; Select Bank 0 ; Test for PLVD trip ; If tripped save 4 pwrfail Operation During SLEEP 8.4 When enabled, the PLVD circuitry continues to operate during SLEEP. If the device voltage crosses the trip point, the LVDIF bit is set and the device awakens from SLEEP. Device execution continues from the interrupt vector address, if interrupts have been globally enabled. TABLE 8-1: Address Effects of a RESET A device RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This forces the PLVD module to be disabled. 8.5 Low Voltage Detect Registers The registers associated with Programmable Low Voltage Detect are shown in Table 8-1. SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH LOW VOLTAGE DETECT Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS 09Ch LVDCON — — BGST LVDEN LV3 LV2 LV1 LV0 --00 0101 --00 0101 08Ch PIE1 LVDIE ADIE C2IE C2IE — — — TMR1IE 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 08Ch PIR1 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C2IF — — — TMR1IF 0000 ---0 0000 ---0  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 67 PIC16C781.book Page 68 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 68 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 69 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.0 ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) MODULE tures a snapshot of the voltage and holds it for the ADC. The ADC then generates the 8-bit result via successive approximation. The 8-bit ADC module, shown in Figure 9-1, has 10 inputs in the PIC16C781/782: The analog reference voltage (ADCREF) is software selectable from the following options: • 8 external channels, AN (RA and RB) • 2 internal channels, VR and VDAC • • • • The ADC allows conversion of an analog input signal to a corresponding 8-bit digital value. The desired channel is connected to a Sample-and-Hold by the input multiplexers. The output of the Sample-and-Hold cap- FIGURE 9-1: The analog positive supply: AVDD The reference input for Comparator C1: VREF1 The Voltage Reference module output: VR The DAC Converter module output: VDAC The ADC has the unique feature of being able to operate while the device is in SLEEP mode. To operate in SLEEP, the ADC conversion clock must be derived from the ADC’s dedicated internal RC oscillator. ADC MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM VOLTAGE COMPARATOR MODULE OPA MODULE 0 RA1/AN1/OPA- 1 RA2/AN2/VREF2 2 RA3/AN3/VREF1 3 RB0/INT/AN4/VR 4 RB1/AN5/VDAC 5 RB2/AN6 6 RB3/AN7/OPA 7 CHS AVDD VREF1 VR VDAC VCFG 0 1 2 3 Sample and Hold ADCREF ADC 8 ADRES 4 RA0/AN0/OPA+ ADON GO/DONE 8 9 DAC MODULE VR MODULE  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 69 PIC16C781.book Page 70 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.1 Control Registers 9.1.1 ADCON0 REGISTER The ADC module has three registers. These registers are: The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 9-1, controls the following: • ADC Result Register: • ADC Control Register 0: • ADC Control Register 1: • • • • ADRES ADCON0 ADCON1 The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 9-1, controls the operations and input channel selection for the ADC module. The ADCON1 register, shown in Register 9-3, selects the voltage reference used by the ADC module. The ADRES register, shown in Register 9-2, holds the 8-bit result of the conversion. Additional information on using the ADC module can be found in the PIC Mid-Range MCU Family Reference Manual (DS33023) and in Application Note AN546 (DS00546). Clock source and prescaler Input channel Conversion start/stop Enabling of the ADC module Setting the ADON bit, ADCON0, enables the ADC module. Clearing ADON disables the module and terminates any conversion in process. The ADCS bits (ADCON0) determine the clock source used by the ADC module. The CHS bits (ADCON0) determine the input channel to the ADC module. CHS specifically determines whether the source is internal or external. Setting the GO/DONE bit (ADCON0) initiates the conversion process. The ADC clears this bit at the completion of the conversion process. REGISTER 9-1: ADC CONTROL REGISTER 0 (ADCON0: 1Fh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/S-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 ADCS1 ADCS0 CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE CHS3 ADON bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-6 ADCS: ADC Conversion Clock Select bits 00 = FOSC/2 01 = FOSC/8 10 = FOSC/32 11 = ADRC (clock derived from a dedicated RC oscillator) bit 5-3 CHS: Analog Channel Select bits (select which channel to convert) If CHS3 = 1: If CHS3 = 0: 000 = channel 0 (AN0) 000 = VR 001 = channel 1 (AN1) 001 = VDAC 010 = channel 2 (AN2) 010 = Reserved. Do not use. 011 = channel 3 (AN3) 011 = Reserved. Do not use. 100 = channel 4 (AN4) 100 = Reserved. Do not use. 101 = channel 5 (AN5) 101 = Reserved. Do not use. 110 = channel 6 (AN6) 110 = Reserved. Do not use. 111 = channel 7 (AN7) 111 = Reserved. Do not use. bit 2 GO/DONE: ADC Conversion Status bit 1 = ADC conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an ADC conversion cycle. 0 = ADC conversion is not in progress (this bit is cleared by hardware when conversion is complete) bit 1 CHS3: Analog Channel Select bit 1 = Internal channel selected for conversion 0 = External channel selected for conversion bit 0 ADON: ADC On bit 1 = ADC enabled 0 = ADC disabled Legend: S = Settable bit DS41171B-page 70 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 71 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.1.2 ADCON1 REGISTER 9.1.3 The ADCON1 register, shown in Register 9-3, controls the reference voltage selection for the ADC module. Bits VCFG (ADCREF). REGISTER 9-2: select the reference ADRES REGISTER The ADRES register, shown in Register 9-2, contains the 8-bit result of the conversion. At the completion of the ADC conversion: voltage • 8-bit result is loaded into ADRES. • GO/DONE bit (ADOCN0) is cleared. • ADC interrupt flag bit ADIF (INTCON and PIR1) are set. • If the ADC interrupt is enabled, an interrupt is also generated. ADC RESULT REGISTER (ADRES: 1Eh) R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x AD7 AD6 AD5 AD4 AD3 AD2 AD1 AD0 bit 7 bit 7-0 bit 0 AD: ADC Conversion Results bits Legend: REGISTER 9-3: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown ADC CONTROL REGISTER 1 (ADCON1: 9Fh) U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 — — VCFG1 VCFG0 — — — — bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ’0’ bit 5-4 VCFG: Voltage Reference Configuration bits 00 = AVDD 01 = VREF1 10 = VR 11 = VDAC bit 3-0 Unimplemented: Read as ’0’ Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 71 PIC16C781.book Page 72 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.2 Configuring the ADC Module 9.2.1 9.2.2 CONFIGURING ANALOG PORT PINS CONFIGURING THE REFERENCE VOLTAGES The VCFG bits in the ADCON1 register configure the ADC module reference voltage input, ADCREF. The reference input can come from any of the following: The ANSEL and TRISB registers control the operation of the ADC port pins. The port pins to be used as analog inputs must have their corresponding TRISB bits set (= 1). The proper ANSEL bits must also be set (analog input) to disable the digital input buffer. • • • • Internal voltage reference (VR) External comparator C1 reference (VREF1) DAC output (VDAC) Analog positive supply (AVDD) If an external reference is chosen for the ADCREF input, the port pin that multiplexes with the incoming external reference must also be configured as an analog input. Note 1: The ADC operation is independent of the state of the TRISB or ANSEL bits. These bits must be configured by the firmware prior to initiation of an ADC conversion. 9.2.3 2: When reading the PORTA or PORTB registers, all pins configured as analog input channels will read as a ‘0’. SELECTING THE ADC CONVERSION CLOCK The ADC conversion cycle requires 9.5TAD. The source of the ADC conversion clock is software selectable. The four possible options for ADC clock are: 3: Analog levels on any pin that is defined as a digital input, including AN, may cause the input buffer to consume excess supply current. • • • • FOSC/2 FOSC/8 FOSC/32 ADRC (clock derived from a dedicated internal RC oscillator) For correct ADC conversion, the ADC conversion clock (TAD) must be selected to ensure a minimum TAD time of 1.6 sec. Table 9-1 shows the resultant TAD times derived from the device operating frequencies and the ADC clock source selected. TABLE 9-1: TAD vs. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES: PIC16C781/782 ADC Clock Source (TAD) Operation ADCS1:ADCS0 Device Frequency 20 MHz 5 MHz 1.25 MHz 333.33kHz 2 TOSC 00 1.6 s 6 s 8 TOSC 01 400 ns 1.6 s 6.4 s 24 s(3) 32 TOSC 10 1.6 s 6.4 s 25.6 s(3) 96 s(3) RC 11 2 - 6 s(1,4) 2 - 6 s(1,4) 2 - 6 s(1,4) 2 - 6 s(1) 100 ns (2) 400 ns (2) Legend: Shaded cells are outside of recommended range. Note 1: The RC source has a typical TAD time of 4 s. 2: These values violate the minimum required TAD time. 3: For faster conversion times, the selection of another clock source is recommended. 4: When device frequency is greater than 1 MHz, the RC ADC conversion clock source is recommended for SLEEP operation only. DS41171B-page 72 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 73 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.2.4 INITIATING A CONVERSION The Analog-to-Digital conversion is initiated by setting the GO/DONE bit in ADCON0 register. When the conversion is complete, the ADC module: • Clears the GO/DONE bit • Sets the ADIF flag in the PIR1 register • Generates an interrupt if the ADIE, PEIE, and GIE bits are set. If the conversion must be aborted, the GO/DONE bit can be cleared in software. The ADRES register will not be updated with the partially completed ADC conversion sample. Instead, the ADRES will contain the value from the last completed conversion. After an aborted conversion, a 2TAD delay is required before another acquisition/conversion can be initiated. Following the delay, an input acquisition is automatically started on the selected channel. Note: 9.3 2. CHOLD = 51.2 pF RS = 10k 1/2 LSb error RSS = 7k@ VDD = 5V Note 1: The reference voltage (ADCREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out. 2: The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is not discharged after each conversion. 3: The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10k This is required to meet the pin leakage specification. The GO/DONE bit should NOT be set in the same instruction that turns on the ADC. 4: After a conversion has completed, a 1.0TAD delay must be completed before acquisition can begin again. During this time the holding capacitor is not connected to the selected ADC input channel. ADC Acquisition Requirements For the ADC module to meet its specified accuracy, the internal Sample-and-Hold capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to charge to within ½ LSb of the voltage present on the input channel (see analog input model in Figure 9-2). The analog source resistance (RS) and the internal sampling switch resistance (RSS) will directly affect the time required to charge CHOLD. In addition, RSS will vary over the power supply voltage range (AVDD), and RS will affect the input offset voltage at the analog input (due to pin leakage current). Therefore: 1. Example 9-1 shows the calculation of the minimum required acquisition time TACQ. This calculation is based on the following system assumptions. The maximum recommended impedance for any analog sources is 10 kOhms. Following any change in the analog input channel selection, a minimum acquisition delay must be observed before another conversion can begin (see Equation 9-1). To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Equation 9-1 may be used. This equation calculates the acquisition time to within ½ LSb error, assuming an 8-bit conversion (512 steps for the PIC16C781/782 ADC). The ½ LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the ADC to meet its specified accuracy. EQUATION 9-1: EXAMPLE 9-1: CALCULATING THE MINIMUM REQUIRED ACQUISITION TIME TACQ = Amplifier Setting Time + Holding Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient TACQ = 5 s + TCAP + [(Temp - 25C)(0.05 s/C)] TCAP = -CHOLD (RIC + RSS + RS) In(1/511) -51.2 pF (1 k+ 7k+ 10kIn(0.0020) -51.2 pF (18 k) In(0.0020) -0.921 s (-6.2364) 5.747 s TACQ = 5 s + 5.747 s + [(50C -25C)(0.05s/C)] 10.747 s + 1.25 s 11.997 s ADC MINIMUM CHARGING TIME VHOLD = (ADCREF-(ADCREF/512))•(1-e-TCAP/CHOLD(RIC+Rss+Rs)) Given: VHOLD = (ADCREF/512), for 1/2LSb resolution The above equation reduces to: TCAP = -(51.2 pF)(1 k+ RSS + RS) Ln(1/511)  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 73 PIC16C781.book Page 74 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 9-2: ANALOG INPUT MODEL VDD RS CPIN 5 pF VA Sampling Switch VT = 0.6V ANx VT = 0.6V RIC  1k SS RSS CHOLD = DAC capacitance = 51.2 pF ILEAKAGE ± 500 nA VSS Legend: CPIN = input capacitance VT = threshold voltage ILEAKAGE = leakage current at the pin due to various junctions RIC SS CHOLD 9.4 = interconnect resistance = sampling switch = sample/hold capacitance (from DAC) ADC Configuration and Conversion 6V 5V VDD 4V 3V 2V 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sampling Switch ( k ) EXAMPLE 9-2: Example 9-2 demonstrates an ADC conversion. The RA0/AN0 pin is configured as the analog input. The reference voltage selected is the device AVDD. The ADC interrupt is enabled, and the ADC conversion clock is ADRC. Clearing the GO/DONE bit during a conversion aborts the current conversion. The ADRES register is NOT updated with the partially completed ADC conversion sample. That is, the ADRES register continues to contain the value of the last completed conversion (or the last value written to the ADRES register). After the ADC conversion is aborted, a 2TAD wait period is required before the next acquisition is started. After this 2TAD wait period, an acquisition is automatically started on the selected channel. ;******************************************** ;* This code block will configure the ADC ;* for polling, AVDD as reference, RC clock ;* and RA0 input. ;* ;* Conversion start & wait for complete ;* polling code included. ;* BANKSEL ADCON1 ; Select Bank 1 CLRF ADCON1 ; AVDD as VREF BSF TRISA,0 ; Set RA0 as input BSF ANSEL,0 ; Set RA0 as analog BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF ADCON0 ; Select Bank0 B’11000001’ ADCON0 ; RC, Ch 0, ADC on ;******************************************** ;* Start & Wait for ADC complete, assumes ;* minimum acquisition delay from ;* configuration. ADC_CNVRT BANKSEL BSF ADC_CN_LOOP BTFSC GOTO MOVF DS41171B-page 74 ADC CONVERSION Preliminary ADCON0 ADCON0,GO ; Select Bank 0 ; Start convert ADCON0,GO ; Test for end ADC_CN_LOOP ; If not, wait ADRES,W ; Get result  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 75 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.4.1 9.6 FASTER CONVERSION/LOWER RESOLUTION TRADE-OFF Not all applications require a result having 8-bits of resolution. Some may instead, require a faster conversion time. The ADC module allows users to make a trade-off of conversion speed for resolution. Regardless of the resolution required, the acquisition time is the same. To speed up the conversion, the clock source of the ADC module may be switched during the conversion, so that the TAD time violates the minimum specified time (see the applicable Electrical Specification). Once the switch is made, all the following ADC result bits are invalid (see ADC Conversion Timing in the Electrical Specifications section). The clock source may only be switched between the three oscillator options (it cannot be switched from/to RC). The equation to determine the time before the oscillator must be switched for a desired resolution is as follows: Conversion time = 2TAD + N • TAD + (8 - N)(2TOSC) Where: N = number of bits of resolution required. Since the TAD is based on the device oscillator, the user must employ some method (such as a timer, software loop, etc.) to determine when the ADC oscillator must be changed. 9.5 ADC Operation During SLEEP The ADC module can operate during SLEEP mode. This requires that the ADC clock source be set to RC (ADCS1:ADCS0 = 11). When the RC clock source is selected, the ADC module waits one instruction cycle before starting the conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed, which eliminates all digital switching noise from the conversion. When the conversion is completed the GO/DONE bit is cleared, and the result is loaded into the ADRES register. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device awakens from SLEEP. If the ADC interrupt is not enabled, the ADC module is turned off, although the ADON bit remains set. When the ADC clock source is another clock option (not RC), a SLEEP instruction causes the present conversion to be aborted and the ADC module to be turned off. The ADON bit remains set. Turning off the ADC places the ADC module in its lowest current consumption state. Note: For the ADC module to operate in SLEEP, the A/D clock source must be set to RC (ADCS1:ADCS0 = 11). To perform an ADC conversion in SLEEP, ensure the SLEEP instruction immediately follows the instruction that sets the GO/DONE bit.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. ADC Accuracy/Error The absolute accuracy (absolute error) specified for the ADC converter includes the sum of all contributions for: • • • • • • Offset error Gain error Quantization error Integral non-linearity error Differential non-linearity error Monotonicity The absolute error is defined as the maximum deviation from an actual transition versus an ideal transition for any code. The absolute error of the ADC converter is specified as < ±1 LSb for ADCREF = VDD (over the device’s specified operating range). However, the accuracy of the ADC converter degrades as VDD diverges from VREF. For a given range of analog inputs, the output digital code will be the same. This is due to the quantization of the analog input to a digital code. Quantization error is typically ± 1/2 LSb and is inherent in the analog to digital conversion process. The only way to reduce quantization error is to use an ADC with greater resolution of the ADC converter. Offset error measures the first actual transition of a code versus the first ideal transition of a code. Offset error shifts the entire transfer function. Offset error can be calibrated out of a system, or introduced into a system, through the interaction of the total leakage current and source impedance at the analog input. Gain error measures the maximum deviation of the last actual transition and the last ideal transition adjusted for offset error. This error appears as a change in slope of the transfer function. The difference in gain error to full scale error is that full scale does not take offset error into account. Gain error can be calibrated out in software. Linearity error refers to the uniformity of the code changes. Linearity errors cannot be calibrated out of the system. Integral non-linearity error measures the actual code transition versus the ideal code transition, adjusted by the gain error for each code. Differential non-linearity measures the maximum actual code width versus the ideal code width. This measure is unadjusted. If the linearity errors are very large, the ADC may become non-monotonic. This occurs when the digital values for one or more input voltages are less than the value for a lower input voltage. Preliminary DS41171B-page 75 PIC16C781.book Page 76 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 9.6.1 9.9 CLOCK NOISE In systems where the device frequency is low, use of the ADC RC clock is preferred. At moderate to high frequencies, TAD should be derived from the device oscillator. TAD must not violate the minimum and should be  8 s for preferred operation. This is because TAD, when derived from TOSC, is kept away from on-chip phase clock transitions. This reduces, to a large extent, the effects of digital switching noise. This is not possible with the RC derived clock. The loss of accuracy due to digital switching noise can be significant if many I/O pins are active. Transfer Function The ideal transfer function of the ADC converter is as follows: the first transition occurs when the analog input voltage (VAIN) is Analog ADCREF/256 (Figure 9-3). 9.10 References A good reference for ADC converters is the "AnalogDigital Conversion Handbook" third edition, published by Prentice Hall (ISBN 0-13-03-2848-0). FIGURE 9-3: ADC TRANSFER FUNCTION 9.7 Effects of a RESET A device RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This forces the ADC module to be turned off, and any conversion is aborted. The value that is in the ADRES register is not modified for a Power-on Reset. The ADRES register contains unknown data after a Power-on Reset. Digital Code Output In systems where the device enters SLEEP mode after the start of the ADC conversion, the RC clock source selection is required. In this mode, the digital noise from the modules in SLEEP is stopped. This method gives high accuracy. FFh FEh 04h 03h 02h 01h Connection Considerations Note: Care must be taken when using the RB2/ AN6 pin in ADC conversions due to its proximity to the OSC1 pin. 256 LSb (Full Scale) 255 LSb 4 LSb 3 LSb 2 LSb 00h If the input voltage exceeds the rail values (VSS or VDD) by greater than 0.2V, then the accuracy of the conversion is out of specification. 0.5 LSb 1 LSb 9.8 Analog Input Voltage An external RC filter is sometimes added for antialiasing of the input signal. The R component should be selected to ensure that the total source impedance is kept under the 10 k recommended specification. Any external components connected (via hi-impedance) to an analog input pin (capacitor, zener diode, etc.) should have very little leakage current at the pin. DS41171B-page 76 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 77 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 9-4: FLOW CHART OF ADC OPERATION ADON = 0 Yes ADON = 0? No Acquire Selected Channel Yes GO = 0? No ADC Clock = RC? Yes Start of ADC Conversion Delayed 1 Instruction Cycle SLEEP Yes Instruction ? No No Device in SLEEP? Finish Conversion GO = 0 ADIF = 1 Yes Abort Conversion GO = 0 ADIF = 0 Wake-up Yes From SLEEP? Finish Conversion GO = 0 ADIF = 1 No No Finish Conversion GO = 0 ADIF = 1 Wait 2TAD SLEEP Power-down A/D Stay in SLEEP Power-down ADC Wait 2TAD Wait 2TAD TABLE 9-2: Address 0Bh REGISTERS/BITS ASSOCIATED WITH ADC, PIC16C781/782 Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR RBIF Value on all other RESETS GIE PEIE T0IE INTE RBIE T0IF INTF 0000 000x 0000 000u LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMR1IE 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 PIR1 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMR1IF 0000 ---0 ADRES ADC Result Register ADCON0 ADCS1 ADCS0 INTCON 8Ch PIE1 0Ch 1Eh 1Fh CHS2 CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE CHS3 0000 ---0 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu ADON 0000 0000 0000 0000 9Fh ADCON1 — — VCFG1 VCFG0 — — — — --00 ---- --00 ---- 05h PORTA RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 06h PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 9Dh ANSEL 1111 1111 1111 1111 Analog Channel Select Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used for ADC conversion.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 77 PIC16C781.book Page 78 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 78 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 79 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 10.0 DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) MODULE 10.1 The Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) module generates an output voltage proportional to the value in the 8-bit DAC register (see Figure 10-1). The output of the DAC module can be configured to drive: • The reference input to the ADC module • The reference input to Comparators C1 and C2 • An analog output on pin RB1/AN5/VDAC The voltage reference input selected from: Control Registers The DAC module is controlled via two special function registers: DACON0 and DAC. The DACON0 register, shown in Register 10-1: • Enables DAC • Enables output on RB1/AN5/VDAC • Selects reference voltage The DAC register, shown in Register 10-2, sets the output of the DAC. to the DAC can be • Analog supply AVDD • Comparator C1 VREF1 • Voltage reference VR REGISTER 10-1: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER CONTROL REGISTER0 (DACON0: 11Fh) R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 DAON DAOE — — — — DARS1 DARS0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 DAON: Digital-to-Analog Converter Enable bit 1 = DAC enabled 0 = DAC disabled bit 6 DAOE: Digital-to-Analog Converter Output Enable bit 1 = Output on the VDAC pin 0 = Output is not available for external use bit 5-2 Unimplemented: Read as ’0’ bit 1-0 DARS: Digital-to-Analog Converter Voltage Reference Select bits, DACREF 00 = Analog supply, AVDD 01 = Comparator reference, VREF1 pin 10 = Voltage reference, VR 11 = Reserved, do not use Legend: REGISTER 10-2: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER REGISTER (DAC: 11Eh) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 bit 7 bit 7-0 x = Bit is unknown bit 0 DA: Digital-to-Analog Converter Digital Input bits Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary ’0’ = Bit is cleared DS41171B-page 79 PIC16C781.book Page 80 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 10.2 Control Register Note 1: To enable the DAC output as a reference for the ADC module, VCFG in ADCON1 must be set. The DAC module is enabled by setting the DAON bit (DACON0). Bits DARS (DACON0) determine the voltage reference for the DAC module. 2: To enable the DAC output as a reference for the Comparator module, C1R/C2R bits (CM1CON0/CM2CON0) must be set. To output the DAC voltage, the DAOE bit (DACON0) and DAON must be set. To use the DAC output internally, the appropriate reference select bits in the destination module must be set. FIGURE 10-1: DAC CONVERTER BLOCK DIAGRAM DAON DARS AVDD VREF1 VR N/C DS41171B-page 80 DACREF EN 0 1 DAC Register 2 8 DAC Converter 3 Preliminary DAOE & DAON VDAC pin VDAC Voltage for ADC and Comparators Reference  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 81 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 DAC Configuration FIGURE 10-2: DAC TRANSFER FUNCTION Example 10-1 shows a sample configuration for the DAC module. The port pin is configured, AVDD is selected for the voltage reference, and the DAC output is enabled. This code block will configure the DAC for AVDD Voltage Ref, and RB1/AN5/VDAC as output. ; ; ; ; MOVLW MOVWF DAC_VALUE DAC ; Set DAC output 10.4 02h 01h Select Bank 2 DAC to 00 Enable DAC output Set REF = VDD 00h Analog Output Voltage Effects of RESET Offset error measures the first actual transition of a code versus the first ideal transition of a code. Offset error shifts the entire transfer function. Offset error can be calibrated out of a system or introduced into a system through the interaction of the output drive capability with the load impedance. A device RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This forces the following conditions: • • • • DAC module is off Reference input to AVDD Output disabled DAC register is cleared 10.5 Gain error measures the maximum deviation of the last actual transition and the last ideal transition adjusted for offset error. This error appears as a change in slope of the transfer function. The difference in gain error to full scale error is that full scale does not take offset error into account. Gain error can be calibrated out by adjusting the reference voltage. DAC Module Accuracy/Error The accuracy/error specified for the DAC includes: • • • • • 256 LSb (full scale) DACON0 DAC B’11000000’ DACON0 03h 255 LSb BANKSEL CLRF MOVLW MOVWF 04h 4 LSb ; Select bank 1 ; Set RB1 input ; Set RB1 as analog 2 LSb BANKSEL TRISB BSF TRISB,1 BSF ANSEL,1 FEh 0.5 LSb 1 LSb ;* ;* ;* FFh DAC CONFIGURATION Digital Code Input EXAMPLE 10-1: 3 LSb 10.3 Integral non-linearity error Differential non-linearity error Gain error Offset error Monotonicity Linearity error refers to the uniformity of the voltage change with code change. Linearity errors cannot be calibrated out of the system. Integral non-linearity error measures the actual voltage output versus the ideal voltage output adjusted by the gain error for each code. Differential non-linearity error measures the maximum actual voltage step versus the ideal voltage step. This measure is unadjusted. TABLE 10-1: Address REGISTERS/BITS ASSOCIATED WITH DAC Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on All Other RESETS 11Fh DACON0 DAON DAOE — — — — DARS1 DARS0 00-- --00 00-- --00 11Eh DAC DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DA3 DA2 DA1 DA0 0000 0000 0000 0000 86h TRISB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 1111 1111 1111 1111 9Dh ANSEL AN7 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 1111 1111 1111 1111 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used for DAC conversion.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 81 PIC16C781.book Page 82 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 82 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 83 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 11.0 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (OPA) MODULE 11.1.1 The OPA module is enabled by setting the OPAON bit (OPACON). When enabled, the OPA forces the output driver of RB3/AN7/OPA into tri-state to prevent contention between the driver and the OPA output. The Operational Amplifier (OPA) Module can be configured as either an OPAMP or Voltage Comparator. The OPA module has the following features: Clearing the CMPEN bit (OPACON,6>) configures the module as an OPAMP. Setting CMPEN configures the module as a voltage comparator. • External connections to all ports • Gain Bandwidth Product selectable: - 70 kHz nom. - 2 MHz nom. • Low leakage inputs • Input Offset Voltage Automatic Calibration Module (ACM) • Input Offset Voltage calibration at a programmable common mode voltage using the DAC • Interrupt-on-change in Comparator mode using IOCB 11.1 The GBWP bit (OPACON) controls the speed of the module in both comparator and OPAMP configurations. Setting GBWP results in a Gain Bandwidth Product (GBWP) of 2 MHz typical. Clearing GBWP0 results in a GBWP of the OPA of 70 kHz typical. Note 1: When the OPA module is enabled, the RB3/AN7/OPA pin is driven by the OPAMP output, not by the PORTB driver. Refer to the Electrical specifications for the OPAMP output drive capability. Control Registers 2: In Comparator mode (CMPEN = 1), an interrupt can be generated using the IOCB feature of RB3. RB3 must be programmed as a digital input with IOCB enabled. The OPACON register, shown in Register 11-1, controls the OPA module. The CALCON register, shown in Register 11-2, controls the Automatic Calibration Module. FIGURE 11-1: OPACON REGISTER OPA MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM OPAON CMPEN GBWP RA0/AN0/OPA+ OPA RA1/AN1/OPARB3/AN7/OPA TO ADC MUX  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 83 PIC16C781.book Page 84 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 11-1: OPAMP CONTROL REGISTER (OPACON: 11Ch) R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 OPAON CMPEN — — — — — GBWP bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 OPAON: OPAMP Enable bit 1 = OPAMP is enabled 0 = OPAMP is disabled bit 6 CMPEN: Comparator Mode Enable bit 1 = Comparator mode 0 = OPAMP mode bit 5-1 Unimplemented: Read as ’0’ bit 0 GBWP: Gain Bandwidth Product Select bits 1 = 2 MHz typ. (fast mode) 0 = 70 kHz typ. (slow mode) Legend: 11.1.2 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown CALCON REGISTER The Automatic Calibration Module (ACM) is an internal state machine which performs an input offset voltage calibration (trim) on the OPA module (see Figure 11-2). Calibration is initiated by setting the CAL bit (CALCON). Upon completion of the calibration sequence, the ACM will clear the CAL bit. Note 1: Auto Calibration must be performed while the module is configured as an OPAMP (CMPEN = 0). Performing Auto Calibration function in the Comparator mode may yield unpredictable results. If a problem arises in the calibration process, the CALERR flag (CALCON) will be set to indicate the failure to calibrate. Setting CALREF (CALCON) forces calibration at a common mode voltage specified by the output of the DAC module. The DAC module must be enabled prior to calibration. Clearing CALREF will perform the calibration with a common mode voltage of 1.2V. The output pin floats during calibration. DS41171B-page 84 Preliminary 2: If the internal 1.2V reference is used for the common mode voltage during Auto Calibration, CALREF = 0 (CALCON), a delay for reference stabilization must be observed before start of calibration. 3: The OPA module shares pins with the ADC module. Performing ADC conversions on the OPA+ or OPA- pins may affect OPAMP stability. 4: When using the DAC as a reference for calibration, CALREF = 1 (CALCON), the VDAC voltage must be within the specified common mode voltage for the OPAMP.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 85 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 11-2: AUTO CALIBRATION MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM OPA- 0 1 OPA+ 0 1 OPA 0 OPA 1 CALREF 1.2V nominal 0 Automatic Calibration Module DAC Module REGISTER 11-2: 1 CALIBRATION CONTROL REGISTER (CALCON: 110h) R/S-0 R-0 R/W-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 CAL CALERR CALREF — — — — — bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 CAL: Start and Status bit 1 = Initiates a calibration 0 = Reserved (CAL is cleared by hardware) bit 6 CALERR: Calibration Error Indicator bit 1 = Error occurred, OPAMP failed 0 = No error bit 5 CALREF: Calibration Voltage Select bit 1 = VDAC set to desired common voltage reference 0 = 1.2V nominal source (internal voltage source) Note: bit 4-0 VDAC must not exceed OPAMP maximum common mode voltage. Reserved: Do not use Legend: S = Cleared by hardware R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 85 PIC16C781.book Page 86 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 11.2 Configuration as OPAMP or Comparator 11.3 Effects of RESET The following example demonstrates calibration of the OPA module as an Operational Amplifier. A device RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This disables the OPA module and clears any calibration. EXAMPLE 11-1: 11.4 ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* CALIBRATION FOR OPAMP MODE This code block will configure the OPA module as an Op Amp, 2 MHz GBWP, and calibrated for a common mode voltage of 1.2V. Routine returns w=0 if calibration good. BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF OPACON B’10000001’ OPACON BCF BSF CALCON,CALREF; Set 1.2V CALCON,CAL ; Start CAL_LOOP BTFSC GOTO MOVLW BTFSS CLRW RETURN ; Select Bank 2 ; Op Amp mode & ; 2 MHz GBWP CALCON,CAL ; CAL_LOOP ; ERROR_FLAG CALCON,CALERR; ; Test for end If not, wait Test for error If no, return 0 The following example demonstrates how to configure and calibrate the OPA module as a Voltage Comparator. EXAMPLE 11-2: ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* CALIBRATION FOR COMPARATOR MODE This code block will configure the OPA module as a voltage comparator, slow speed, and calibrated for a common mode voltage of 2.5 V (assumes VDD=5V). Routine returns w=0 if calibration good. BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF OPACON B’10000000’ OPACON ; Select Bank 2 BSF ; Op Amp mode, ; slow CALCON,CALREF; Common mode=DAC MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF H’0x80’ DAC B’10000000’ DACON0 BSF CAL_LOOP BTFSC GOTO MOVLW BTFSS CLRW BSF RETURN DS41171B-page 86 OPA Module Performance Common AC and DC performance specifications for the OPA module: • • • • • Common Mode Voltage Range Leakage Current Input Offset Voltage Open Loop Gain Gain Bandwidth Product Common mode voltage range is the specified voltage range for the OPA+ and OPA- inputs, for which the OPA module will perform to within its specifications. The OPA module is designed to operate with input voltages between 0 and VDD-1.4V. Behavior for Common mode voltages greater than VDD-1.4V, or below 0V, are not guaranteed. Leakage current is a measure of the small source or sink currents on the OPA+ and OPA- inputs. To minimize the effect of leakage currents, the effective impedances connected to the OPA+ and OPA- inputs should be kept as small as possible and equal. Input offset voltage is a measure of the voltage difference between the OPA+ and OPA- inputs in a closed loop circuit with the OPA in its linear region. The offset voltage will appear as a DC offset in the output equal to the input offset voltage, multiplied by the gain of the circuit. The input offset voltage is also affected by the Common mode voltage. The OPA has an automatic calibration module which can minimize the input offset voltage of the module. Open loop gain is the ratio of the output voltage to the differential input voltage, (OPA+) - (OPA-). The gain is greatest at DC and falls off with frequency. Gain Bandwidth Product or GBWP is the frequency at which the open loop gain falls off to 0 dB. The lower GBWP is optimized for systems requiring low frequency response and low power consumption. ; DAC at VDD/2 CALCON,CAL ; enable DAC, ; VDD ref ; Start CALCON,CAL CAL_LOOP ; Test for end ; If not, wait ERROR_FLAG CALCON,CALERR; Test for error ; If no, return 0 OPACON,CMPEN ; Comparator mode Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 87 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 11-1: Address REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE OPA MODULE Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 CMPEN — Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 11Ch OPACON OPAON 110h CALCON CAL 9Dh ANSEL AN7 86h TRISB PORTB Data Direction Register 85h TRISA PORTA Data Direction Register 11Eh DAC 11Fh DACON0 CALERR CALREF AN6 AN5 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS — — — — — — — — — 000- ---- 000- ---- AN1 AN0 1111 1111 1111 1111 AN4 AN3 AN2 GBWP 00-- ---0 00-- ---0 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 1111 DA7 DA6 DA5 DA4 DAON DAOE — — DA3 DA1 — — DA1 DA0 0000 0000 0000 0000 DARS1 DARS0 00-- --00 00-- --00 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used for the OPA module.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 87 PIC16C781.book Page 88 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 88 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 89 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 12.0 COMPARATOR MODULE The comparator module has two separate voltage comparators: Comparator C1 and Comparator C2 (see Figure 12-1). Each comparator offers the following list of features: • • • • • • • • • • Control and configuration register Comparator output available externally Programmable output polarity Interrupt-on-change flags Wake-up from SLEEP Configurable as feedback input to the PSMC Programmable four input multiplexer Programmable reference selections Programmable speed Output synchronization to Timer1 clock input (Comparator C2 only) 12.1 TABLE 12-1: Control Registers COMPARATOR C1 CONTROL REGISTER The CM1CON0 register (shown in Register 12-1) contains the control and status bits for the following: • • • • • The output of the comparator is available internally via the C1OUT flag (CM1CON0). To make the output available for an external connection, the C1OE flag (CM1CON0) must be set. If the module is disabled with C1OE set, the output will be driven as shown in Table 12-2: The polarity of the comparator output can be inverted by setting the C1POL flag (CM1CON0). Clearing C1POL results in a non-inverted output. A complete table showing the output state versus input conditions and the polarity bit is shown in Table 12-2. Both comparators have separate control and configuration registers: CM1CON0 for C1 and CM2CON0 for C2. In addition, Comparator C2 has a second control register, CM2CON1, for synchronization control and simultaneous reading of both comparator outputs. 12.1.1 Setting C1R (CM1CON0) selects the output of the DAC module as the reference voltage for the comparator. Clearing C1R selects the VREF1 input on the RA3/ AN3/VREF1 pin. Input Condition C1POL C1OUT C1VN > C1VP 0 0 C1VN < C1VP 0 1 C1VN > C1VP 1 1 C1VN < C1VP 1 0 Note 1: The internal output of the comparator is latched at the end of each instruction cycle. External outputs are not latched. 2: The C1 interrupt will operate correctly with C1OE set or cleared. Comparator enable Comparator input selection Comparator reference selection Output mode Comparator speed 3: For the output of C1 on RB6/C1/ PSMC1A, the PSMC must be disabled and TRISB must be ‘0’. Setting C1ON (CM1CON0) enables Comparator C1 for operation. Bits C1CH (CM1CON0) select the comparator input from the four analog pins AN. Note: OUTPUT STATE VERSUS INPUT CONDITIONS C1SP (CM1CON0) configures the speed of the comparator. When C1SP is set, the comparator operates at its normal speed. Clearing C1SP operates the comparator in a slower, low power mode. To use AN as analog inputs, the appropriate bits must be programmed in the ANSEL register.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 89 PIC16C781.book Page 90 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 12-1: COMPARATOR C1 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM C1CH 2 RB0/INT/AN4/VR To Interrupt and PSMC Logic C1ON 0 RB1/AN5/VDAC 1 C1VP RB2/AN6 C1OE C1SP C1VN RB6/C1/PSMC1A C1OUT C1 2 RB3/AN7/OPA C1POL 3 C1R RA3/AN3/VREF1 0 VDAC FIGURE 12-2: 1 COMPARATOR C2 SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM C2CH 2 RB0/INT/AN4/VR 0 To Interrupt and PSMC Logic C2ON C2SYNC C2SP RB1/AN5/VDAC C2VN 1 C2VP RB2/AN6 C2OUT C2 2 C2POL 3 C2R 0 VDAC DS41171B-page 90 RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G 1 RB3/AN7/OPA RA2/AN2/VREF2 0 C2OE D From TMR1 Clock Q Q 1 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 91 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 12-1: COMPARATOR C1 CONTROL REGISTER0 (CM1CON0: 119h) R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 C1ON: Comparator C1 Enable bit 1 = C1 Comparator is enabled 0 = C1 Comparator is disabled bit 6 C1OUT: Comparator C1 Output bit If C1POL = 1 (inverted polarity): C1OUT = 1, C1VP < C1VN C1OUT = 0, C1VP > C1VN If C1POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): C1OUT = 1, C1VP > C1VN C1OUT = 0, C1VP < C1VN bit 5 C1OE: Comparator C1 Output Enable bit 1 = C1OUT is present on the RB6/C1/PSMC1A pin(1) 0 = C1OUT is internal only bit 4 C1POL: Comparator C1 Output Polarity Select bit 1 = C1OUT logic is inverted 0 = C1OUT logic is not inverted bit 3 C1SP: Comparator C1 Speed Select bit 1 = C1 operates in normal speed mode 0 = C1 operates in low power, slow speed mode bit 2 C1R: Comparator C1 Reference Select bits (non-inverting input) 1 = C1VP connects to VDAC output 0 = C1VP connects to VREF1 bit 1-0 C1CH: Comparator C1 Channel Select bits 00 = C1VN of C1 connects to AN4 01 = C1VN of C1 connects to AN5 10 = C1VN of C1 connects to AN6 11 = C1VN of C1 connects to AN7 Note 1: C1OUT will only drive RB6/C1/PSMC1A if: (C2OE = 1) & (C2ON = 1) & (TRISB = 0) & ((SMCON = 0) or ((SMCOM = 0) & (SCEN = 0))). Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 91 PIC16C781.book Page 92 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 12.1.2 COMPARATOR C2 CONTROL REGISTERS The CM2CON0 register is a functional copy of the CM1CON0 register described in Section 12.1.1. A second control register, CM2CON1, is also present for control of an additional synchronizing feature, as well as mirrors of both comparator outputs. 12.1.2.1 The output of the comparator is available internally via the C2OUT bit (CM2CON0). To make the output available for an external connection, the C2OE bit (CM2CON0) must be set. Note 1: The internal output of the comparator is latched at the end of each instruction cycle. External outputs are not latched. 2: The C2 interrupt will operate correctly with C2OE set or cleared. An external output is not required for the C2 interrupt. Control Register CM2CON0 The CM2CON0 register, shown in Register 12-2, contains the control and status bits for Comparator C2. 3: For C2 output on RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G: (C2OE=1) & (C2ON=1) & (TRISB=0) & ((SMCON=0) or ((SMCOM=0) & (SCEN=0))). Setting C2ON (CM2CON0) enables Comparator C2 for operation. Bits C2CH (CM2CON0) select the comparator input from the four analog pins, AN. Note 1: To use AN as analog inputs, the appropriate bits must be programmed in the ANSEL register. C2R (CM2CON0) selects the reference to be used with the comparator. Setting C2R (CM2CON0) selects the output of the DAC module as the reference for the comparator. Clearing C2R selects the VREF2 input on the RA2/AN2/VREF2 pin. DS41171B-page 92 The comparator output, C2OUT, can be inverted by setting the C2POL bit (CM2CON0). Clearing C2POL results in a non-inverted output. A complete table showing the output state versus input conditions and the polarity bit is shown in Table 12-3. C2SP (CM2CON0) configures the speed of the comparator. When C2SP is set, the comparator operates at its normal speed. Clearing C2SP operates the comparator in low power mode. Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 93 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 12-2: COMPARATOR C2 CONTROL REGISTER0 (CM2CON0: 11Ah) R/W-0 R-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 C2ON: Comparator C2 Enable bit 1 = C2 Comparator is enabled 0 = C2 Comparator is disabled bit 6 C2OUT: Comparator C2 Output bit If C2POL = 1 (inverted polarity): C2OUT = 1, C2VP < C2VN C2OUT = 0, C2VP > C2VN If C2POL = 0 (non-inverted polarity): C2OUT = 1, C2VP > C2VN C2OUT = 0, C2VP < C2VN bit 5 C2OE: Comparator C2 Output Enable bit 1 = C2OUT is present on RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G(1) 0 = C2OUT is internal only bit 4 C2POL: Comparator C2 Output Polarity Select bit 1 = C2OUT logic is inverted 0 = C2OUT logic is not inverted bit 3 C2SP: Comparator C2 Speed Select bit 1 = C2 operates in normal speed mode 0 = C2 operates in low power, slow speed mode. bit 2 C2R: Comparator C2 Reference Select bits (non-inverting input) 1 = C2VP connects to VDAC 0 = C2VP connects to VREF2 bit 1-0 C2CH: Comparator C2 Channel Select bits 00 = C2VN of C2 connects to AN4 01 = C2VN of C2 connects to AN5 10 = C2VN of C2 connects to AN6 11 = C2VN of C2 connects to AN7 Note 1: C2OUT will only drive RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G if: (C2OE = 1) & (C2ON = 1) & (TRISB = 0) & ((SMCON = 0) or ((SMCOM = 0) & (SCEN = 0))). Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 93 PIC16C781.book Page 94 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 12.1.2.2 Control Register CM2CON1 Comparator C2 has one additional feature: its output can be synchronized to the Timer1 clock input. Setting C2SYNC (CM2CON1) synchronizes the output of Comparator 2 to the falling edge of Timer 1’s clock input (see Figure 12-1 and Register 12-3). REGISTER 12-3: The CM2CON1 register also contains mirror copies of both comparator outputs, MC1OUT and MC2OUT (CM2CON1). The ability to read both outputs simultaneously from a single register eliminates the timing skew of reading separate registers. COMPARATOR C2 CONTROL REGISTER1 (CM2CON1: 11Bh) R-0 R-0 MC1OUT MC2OUT U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 — — — — — C2SYNC bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 MC1OUT: Mirror Copy of C1OUT (CM1CON0) bit 6 MC2OUT: Mirror Copy of C2OUT (CM2CON0) bit 5-1 Unimplemented: Read as ’0’ bit 0 C2SYNC: C2 Output Synchronous Mode bit 1 = C2 output is synchronous to falling edge of TMR1 clock 0 = C2 output is asynchronous Legend: DS41171B-page 94 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 95 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 12.2 Comparator Configuration 12.2.1 The following examples show the use of the Comparator module in: • A simple voltage comparator configuration synchronized to the Timer 1 clock input. • A comparator input to the PSMC with a programmable DAC reference. • A low power window comparator configuration with interrupt-on-change. FIGURE 12-3: EXAMPLE: C2 SYNCHRONIZED TO T1CKI In this example, Comparator C2 is configured as a normal voltage comparator synchronized to the T1CKI input. A block diagram of the comparator with external connections is shown in Figure 12-2. COMPARATOR C2 CONFIGURATION WITH OUTPUT SYNCHRONIZED TO T1CKI PIC16C78X C2POL RB2/AN6 - INPUT D C2 + RA2/AN2/VREF2 CK Q CM2CON0 Q External Reference RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI External Oscillator EXAMPLE 12-1: ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* 12.2.2 C2 CONFIGURATION PROGRAM This code block will configure C2 for normal speed and output polarity, input on AN6, Reference from VREF2, and output synchronization to TMR1 clock. BANKSEL BSF BSF BSF TRISA TRISA,RA2 TRISA,RA6 TRISB,RB2 ; ; ; ; BSF BSF ANSEL,AN2 ANSEL,AN6 ; AN2 as analog ; AN6 as analog BANKSEL CM2CON0 MOVLW B’10001010’ MOVWF CM2CON0 BSF Select RA2 as RA6 as RB2 as Bank 1 input input input EXAMPLE: C1 INPUT TO PSMC W/ DAC AS REFERENCE In this example, Comparator C1 is configured as a noninverting normal speed voltage comparator input to the PSMC, with a programmable reference voltage. A block diagram of the comparator with external connections is shown in Figure 12-3. ; Select Bank 2 ; Set C2; no out ; VREF2, AN6 CM2CON1,C2SYNC ; CLK sync  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 95 PIC16C781.book Page 96 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 12-4: CONFIGURATION OF COMPARATOR C1 WITH DAC PIC16C78X C1POL = 0 RB3/AN7/OPA C1OUT - INPUT C1 PSMC + VDAC EXAMPLE 12-2: ;* ;* ;* DAC PROGRAMMING C1 FOR PSMC FEEDBACK 12.2.3 To form a low power window comparator, Comparators C1 & C2 are configured as follows: This code block will configure Comparator C1 for normal speed and output polarity, input on AN7, and Reference from the DAC BANKSEL BSF BSF TRISA TRISB,RB3 ANSEL,AN7 BANKSEL CLRF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF DACON0 ; DAC ; B’10000000’ ; DACON0 ; DAC_VALUE DAC ; MOVLW MOVWF B’10001111’ ; C1; no out, CM1CON0 ; VREF1, AN7 FIGURE 12-5: EXAMPLE: LOW POWER WINDOW COMPARATOR WITH INTERRUPT • Common input RB0/INT/AN4/VREF • Separate external reference voltages • Programmed for slow speed operation ; Select Bank 1 ; RB3 as input ; Set RB3 as analog In addition, the output of comparator C2 must be inverted for common polarity with C1. Select Bank 2 DAC=00h Enable, no out DACREF = VDD A block diagram of the window comparator with external connections is shown in Figure 12-4. Trip Level WINDOW COMPARATOR WITH INTERRUPT PIC16C78X INPUT AN4 C2 CM2CON1 + CLPOL=1 VREF2 VOLTAGE REFERENCE C1 VREF1 + CM2CON1 CLPOL=0 DS41171B-page 96 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 97 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 EXAMPLE 12-3: ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* ;* WINDOW COMPARATOR Example of Low Power Window Comparator C1 This code block will configure Comparator C1 and C2 for slow speed, C1 non invert, C2 invert, input on AN4, and external References Interrupt service routine included BANKSEL BSF BSF BSF TRISA TRISA,2 TRISA,3 TRISB,0 ; ; ; ; Select Bank 1 RA2 input RA3 input Set RB0 BSF BSF BSF ANSEL,AN2 ANSEL,AN3 ANSEL,AN4 ; RA2 analog ; RA3 analog ; RB4 analog BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF CM1CON0 ; B’10000000’ ; CM1CON0 ; B’10010000’ ; CM2CON0 ; Select Bank 2 C1: no output VREF1, AN4 C2: no output invert,VREF1,AN4 BANKSEL PIE1 ; Select Bank 1 BCF INTCON,GIE ; Disable Int BSF PIE1,C1IE ; Enabl C1&C2 Ints BSF PIE1,C2IE BSF INTCON,PEIE BSF INTCON,GIE ; Enabl Global Ints ;******************************************** ;* WINDOW COMPARATOR ISR with context save WC_INT_SRV_R MOVWF SWAPF MOVWF BANKSEL MOVLW ANDWF MOVWF W_SAVE ; Save W & STATUS STATUS,W STATUS_SAV PIR1 ; Select Bank 0 B’00110000’ ; Save Int PIR1,W WIN_INT ;*** CLEAR C1 INTERRUPT BTFSS GOTO BANKSEL MOVF BANKSEL BCF WIN_INT,C1IF; C1 Int ? TST_C2_INT CM1CON0 ; Select Bank 2 CM1CON0,F ; Clear C2 mismatch PIR1 ; Select Bank 0 PIR1,C1IF ; Clear C2 Int ;*** CLEAR C2 INTERRUPT TXT_C2_INT BTFSS GOTO BANKSEL MOVF BANKSEL BCF WIN_INT,C2IF; C2 int? USER_ISR CM2CON0 ; Select Bank 2 CM2CON0,F ; Clear C2 mismatch PIR1 ; Select Bank 0 PIR1,C1IF ; Clear C2 int USER_ISR ;*** USER INTERRUPT ROUTING ;* SWAPF MOVWF SWAPF SWAPF RETFIE STATUS_SAVE,W; Restore W & ; STATUS STATUS W_SAVE,F W_SAVE,W ; Return  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 97 PIC16C781.book Page 98 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 12.3 Effects of RESET A RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This disables both comparators. TABLE 12-2: Address REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE COMPARATOR MODULE Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 0000 0000 0000 0000 C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 0000 0000 0000 0000 — — C2SYNC 00-- ---0 00-- ---0 PORTA Data Direction Register 1111 1111 1111 1111 PORTB Data Direction Register 1111 1111 1111 1111 Name Bit 7 Bit 6 119h CM1CON0 C1ON 11Ah CM2CON0 C2ON 11Bh CM2CON1 MC1OUT MC2OUT 85h TRISA 86h TRISB 05h PORTA RA7 RA6 Bit 5 — RA5 Bit 4 — — RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 uuuu 0000 06h PORTB RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 xxxx 0000 9Dh ANSEL AN7 AN6 AN5 AN4 AN3 AN2 AN1 AN0 1111 1111 1111 1111 0Ch PIR1 LVDIF ADIF C2IF C1IF — — — TMR1ON 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 8Ch PIE1 LVDIE ADIE C2IE C1IE — — — TMR1IE 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used for comparator. DS41171B-page 98 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 99 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.0 PROGRAMMABLE SWITCH MODE CONTROLLER (PSMC) The Programmable Switch Mode Controller module provides all the necessary features to implement a pulsed feedback control system. The PSMC generates a pulse output based on its analog feedback. Feedback from the comparator is programmable, allowing: • Single or dual channel feedback • Programmable reference voltage selection • Programmable polarity The pulse output of the PSMC is also programmable, featuring either Pulse Width (PWM) or Pulse Skip (PSM) Modulation. In PSM, a fixed duty cycle is generated or skipped, based on feedback. In PWM a feedback controlled pulse width is generated. In addition, the output configuration of the PSMC is programmable, enabling the following features: All pulse start and duty cycle limit timing features of the PSMC are derived from the internal CPU clock. Block diagrams for the PSMC are shown in Figure 13-1 through Figure 13-3. 13.1 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) In the PWM mode, the PSMC (shown in Figure 13-1 and Figure 13-2) is a timer-driven set/RESET pulse generator. Pulses are initiated by the internal counter chain. Following the completion of the programmable minimum duty cycle, the output pulse is terminated by either a high to low transition on the comparator output, or by the programmable maximum duty cycle (see Table 13-1 and Table 13-2). The resulting output is a variable duty cycle pulse with: • • • • Programmable frequency Feedback specified duty cycle Programmable minimum duty cycle including 0% Programmable maximum duty cycle • A single output • A single output plus a slope compensation output • Dual alternating outputs FIGURE 13-1: PSMC MODULE IN SINGLE OUTPUT PWM MODE (SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM) EXAMPLE Min DC Period New Cycle FOSC 1:1 SMCCL1 3 S1 1:2 1:4 1:8 Max D/C SC Switch 2 1 C1OUT 0 RB6/C1/ PSMC1A RB7/C2/ PSMC1B/T1G S0 SMCCL0 PSMC CLK HIGH IMPEDANCE ASSUMES 4-bit Counter S1APOL New Cycle S 2 RB6/C1/PSMC1A Q Set Dominant R 2 PSMC Max Controller DC MINDC HIGH IMPEDANCE SCEN=1 PWM/PSM=1 SMCON=1 SMCOM=0 DC = Duty Cycle 4 MAXDC S1APOL=0 SMCCS=0 SC Switch VDD C1POL RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G C1OUT C1 C2POL SMCCS SCEN N C2OUT C2 Comparator Module  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 99 PIC16C781.book Page 100 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 13-2: PSMC MODULE IN DUAL ALTERNATING OUTPUT PWM MODE (SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM) EXAMPLE Min DC Min DC Min DC Period Period New Cycle A FOSC 1:1 1:2 1:4 1:8 3 S1 2 1 0 New Cycle B Max DC SMCCL1 SMCCL0 C1OUT RB6/C1/ PSMC1A RB7/C2/ PSMC1B/T1G S0 PSMC CLK ASSUMES 4-bit Counter S1APOL=0 S1BPOL=0 DC = Duty Cycle 4 MAXDC MINDC SMCCS=0 PWM/PSM=1 SMCON=1 SMCOM=1 S1APOL 2 New Cycle A PSMC Controller New Cycle B 2 Max DC S RB6/C1/PSMC1A Q Set Dominant R C1POL S1BPOL RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G C1OUT C1 S Set Dominant R SMCCS C2POL Q C2OUT C2 Comparator Module TABLE 13-1: PSMC1A OUTPUT SEQUENCE IN PWM MODE USING C1 COMPARATOR ONLY Time MINDC C1OUT PSMC1A Output Signal 00 H L x x HL LH x 01 0 01 1 q 0 0 q 0 Beginning of PWM cycle During Min Duty Cycle After Min Duty Cycle, Before Max Duty Cycle non-zero non-zero x Max Duty Cycle Legend: x = Don’t Care DS41171B-page 100 x q = Prior State 0 = Inactive 1 = Active Preliminary H = High L = Low  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 101 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 13-2: PSMC1A OUTPUT SEQUENCE IN PWM MODE USING C1 AND C2 COMPARATORS Time MINDC C1OUT C2OUT PSMC1A Output Signal 00 H L x x x HL LH H x x H x L x x H x HL LH x 01 0 0 01 1 q0 0 q0 0 q0 Beginning of PWM cycle non-zero non-zero x During Min Duty Cycle After Min Duty Cycle, Before Max Duty Cycle Max Duty Cycle Legend: x = Don’t Care x q = Prior State  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. 0 = Inactive 1 = Active Preliminary H = High L = Low DS41171B-page 101 PIC16C781.book Page 102 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.1.1 PULSE SKIP MODULATION (PSM) cycle. If the comparator output = L, no pulse is initiated and the PSMC waits for the start of the next pulse (see Table 13-3 and Table 13-4). In this mode, both the frequency and duty cycle of the output pulse are programmable. The analog feedback gates the presence or absence of the pulse on a pulse-by-pulse basis. In PSM (Pulse Skip Modulation), the PSMC operates as a fixed duty cycle pulse generator, with its output gated by the analog feedback (see Figure 13-3). Immediately prior to the initiation of a pulse, the analog feedback is sampled. If the comparator output = H, a pulse is initiated and held active for the programmed duty FIGURE 13-3: PSMC MODULE IN SINGLE OUTPUT PSM MODE (SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM) EXAMPLE Period New Cycle FOSC :1 :2 :4 Programmed DC :8 Select DC 15/16 Period SC Switch 3 S1 SMCCL1 SMCCL0 2 1 C1OUT RB6/C1/ PSMC1A RB7/C2/ PSMC1B/T1G 0 S0 PSMC CLK HIGH IMPEDANCE ASSUMES 4-bit Counter DC = Duty Cycle 4 S1APOL=0 SMCCS=0 S1APOL New Cycle DC S HIGH IMPEDANCE SCEN=1 PWM/PSM=0 SMCON=1 SMCOM=0 RB6/C1/PSMC1A Q Set Dominant R 2 PSMC Max Controller DC SC Switch VDD C1POL C1OUT RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G C1 SMCCS C2POL N SCEN C2OUT C2 Comparator Module TABLE 13-3: PSMC1A OPERATION IN PSM MODE USING C1 COMPARATOR ONLY Time Beginning of PSM cycle During Pulse End of Pulse Legend: x = Don’t Care DS41171B-page 102 C1OUT PSMC1A Output Signal H L x 01 0 No Change 1 10 x 0 = Inactive 1 = Active H = High Preliminary L = Low  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 103 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 13-4: PSMC1A OUTPUT SEQUENCE IN PSM MODE USING C1 AND C2 COMPARATORS Time C1OUT C2OUT PSMC1A Output Signal H L x x x x H x L x x x 01 0 0 No Change No Change 10 1 = Active H = High Beginning of PSM cycle During Pulse Duty Cycle After Pulse Duty Cycle Legend: x = Don’t Care 13.1.2 0 = Inactive SINGLE OR DUAL OUTPUT 13.1.3 The PSMC has the capability to operate with either a single output, or dual alternating outputs. In the single output mode, the PSMC generates an output pulse on PSMC1A output only. The pulses are at the programmed frequency, and are variable between the programmed minimum and maximum duty cycle limits. In the dual output mode, the PSMC generates output pulses which alternate between PSMC1A and PSMC1B. The pulses generated at each output are generated at one half of the programmed frequency, and between 50% of the programmed minimum. and 50% maximum of the output duty cycle. The maximum duty cycle for either output is 50%. FIGURE 13-4: L = Low SLOPE COMPENSATION An optional feature of the PSMC single output mode is the ability to configure the PSMC1B output for use as a slope compensation ramp generator. In this mode, the PSMC1B output is pulled low for the last 1/16 of each pulse cycle. Connecting the PSMC1B output to an RC network, similar to Figure 13-4, results in a positive going pseudo ramp function. This pseudo ramp function is useful as an offset function for the loop error signal in unstable conditions at a duty cycle of greater than 50%. Note: When the Slope Compensation switch is enabled (SMCOM = 0, and SCEN = 1), the S1BPOL bit has no effect (see RC Network on next page for more detail). SLOPE COMPENSATION (SC) SWITCH OPERATION t = 15/16T t=0 VDD PWM Signal on PSMC1A pin PSMC1A PIC16C78X VDD PSMC Module R DC = duty cycle PSMC1B T = Period 150 - On C SC Switch SC Switch on PSMC1B pin - Off VSS VSS To Slope Compensation Circuit Voltage across C  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 103 PIC16C781.book Page 104 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.2 Control Registers In the PWM mode, the MAXDC bits (PSMCCON0 ) specify the maximum duty cycle limit. The PSMC is controlled by means of two special function registers: PSMCCON0 and PSMCCON1. In the PSM mode, the DC bits (PSMCCON0) specify the fixed duty cycle. The PSMCCON0 register (Register 13-1) contains control bits for: • Frequency of the output pulse • Minimum and maximum duty cycle in PWM mode • Fixed duty cycle in PSM mode 13.2.2 The PSMCCON1 register (Register 13-2) contains the control bits for: The PWM/PSM bit (PSMCCON1) configures the output mode of the PSMC. When the PWM/PSM bit is set, the PSMC is configured for a PWM output. When the PWM/PSM bit is cleared, a fixed duty cycle pulse is output. To enable the PSMC operation, the SMCON bit in the PSMCCON1 register must be set (see Register 13-2). • Enabling the PSMC module • Setting the PSMC mode • Configuring inputs and outputs Note: 13.2.1 The SMCCS bit (PSMCCON1) sets the input mode. When the SMCCS bit is set, the PSMC is configured for two inputs: C1 and C2. When cleared, only Comparator C1 is used. Following RESET, both the PSMC1A and PSMC1B outputs are held tri-state until the PSMC is configured. Driver circuitry for all power MOSFET transistors must have a resistor bias to turn off the transistor in the event of tri-state conditions, on either PSMC1A or PSMC1B, to prevent excessive stress on the MOSFET's and their associated circuitry. SMCOM bit (PSMCCON1) determines the number of outputs from the PSMC. When SMCOM is set, both PSMC1A and PSMC1B are active. When SMCOM is cleared, only the PSMC1A output is active and the PSMC1B output is available for another function. S1APOL and S1BPOL control the polarity of the PSMC outputs. Setting the polarity bit configures the corresponding output for an active low state. Clearing the bit results in an active high output. PSMCCON0 REGISTER The SMCCL bits in the PSMCCON0 register, are used to set the pulse frequency of the PSMC. Note: The SCEN bit (PSMCCON1) enables the slope compensation output. When SCEN is set (and SMCOM is cleared) the PSMC1B output is configured to generate a slope compensation signal. Changing SMCCL bits with the PSMC enabled (SMCON=1) can result in unpredictable output. Always disable PSMC before changing SMCCL. Note: In the PWM mode, the MINDC bits (PSMCCON0 ) specify the minimum duty cycle. TABLE 13-5: PSMCCON1 REGISTER PSMC outputs must have their corresponding direction bits cleared in TRISB; TRISB: for PSMC1A, and TRISB for PSMC1B. PSMC OUTPUT MODES PSMC PORTB FUNCTION SMCOM SCEN TRISB Single Output 0 0 0 * Single Output + Slope Compensation 0 1 0 0 x 0 0 Dual Output 1 Legend: x = Don’t Care *As needed for other functions (such as C2, RB7, T1G). DS41171B-page 104 Preliminary TRISB  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 105 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 13-1: PSMC CONTROL REGISTER0 (PSMCCON0: 111h) R/W-0 R/W-0 SMCCL1 SMCCL0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 MINDC1 MINDC0 MAXDC1 MAXDC0 DC1 DC0 bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-6 SMCCL: Clock Frequency Select bits 00 = Output frequency for single output mode is FOSC/128 01 = Output frequency for single output mode is FOSC/64 10 = Output frequency for single output mode is FOSC/32 11 = Output frequency for single output mode is FOSC/16 bit 5-4 MINDC: Minimum Duty Cycle Select bits for PWM Mode 00 = Min duty cycle of 0 01 = Min duty cycle of 1/8 10 = Min duty cycle of 1/4 11 = Min duty cycle of 3/8 bit 3-2 MAXDC: Maximum Duty Cycle Select bits for PWM Mode 00 = Max duty cycle of 1/2 01 = Max duty cycle of 5/8 10 = Max duty cycle of 3/4 11 = Max duty cycle of 15/16 bit 1-0 DC: Duty Cycle Select bits for PSM Mode 00 = Duty cycle of 1/8 01 = Duty cycle of 3/8 10 = Duty cycle of 5/8 11 = Duty cycle of 15/16 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary x = Bit is unknown DS41171B-page 105 PIC16C781.book Page 106 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 13-2: PSMC CONTROL REGISTER1 (PSMCCON1: 112h) R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 SMCON S1APOL S1BPOL — SCEN SMCOM PWM/PSM SMCCS bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 SMCON: PSMC Module Enable bit 1 = PSMC module on 0 = PSMC module off bit 6 S1APOL: PSMC1A Output Polarity Control bit 1 = PSMC1A output signal is asserted low 0 = PSMC1A output signal is asserted high bit 5 S1BPOL: PSMC1B Output Polarity Control bit 1 = PSMC1B output signal is asserted low 0 = PSMC1B output signal is asserted high Unimplemented: Read as ’0 bit 4 bit 3 SCEN: Slope Compensation Output Enable bit If SMCOM = 1: x = This bit is ignored If SMCOM = 0: 1 = Slope Compensation Switch on PSMC1B pin is enabled 0 = Slope Compensation Switch on PSMC1B pin is not enabled. PSMC1B pin is available for other functions. bit 2 SMCOM: PSMC Output Mode bit 1 = Dual alternating output mode. The module outputs are available on the PSMC1A and PSMC1B pins. 0 = Single output mode. The module output is available on the PSMC1A pin. bit 1 PWM/PSM: PSMC Modulation Mode Select bit 1 = PWM mode (Pulse Width Modulation) 0 = PSM mode (Pulse Skipping Modulation) bit 0 SMCCS: PSMC Comparator Select bit 1 = PSMC module uses inputs from both C1OUT and C2OUT 0 = SMC module uses input from C1OUT only Legend: DS41171B-page 106 R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared Preliminary x = Bit is unknown  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 107 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.3 Configuration The programmable nature of the PSMC lends itself to a wide variety of applications involving current or voltage management. The following examples are intended to provide suggested applications for the PSMC. The examples are not complete designs, but rather block diagrams of some potential applications of the PSMC. For a broader list of applications, including supporting math and firmware examples, please refer to Microchip web page for applicable Application Notes. 13.3.1 EXAMPLE BOOST LC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY In this example, the PSMC controls the boost configuration switching power supply in Figure 13-5. The PSMC is configured as a two feedback loop PWM, current mode, switching power supply controller. The inner current feedback loops consist of: • • • • • • PSMC MOSFET driver Power MOSFET Q1 Inductor L1 Current transformer Comparator C1 The inner current loop is a pulsed current source driven by the PSMC. During the active phase of the output pulse, the inner loop builds up a current flow in inductor L1. The current in L1 is monitored by the current transformer. The output of the transformer is offset by the ramp from the slope compensation network R3/C1 and then fed into the comparator. When the voltage (proportional to the current flow in L1, offset by the slope compensation) exceeds the error voltage from the OPAMP, Q1 is turned off and L1 discharges through D1 into CMAIN for the remainder of the period. The outer voltage loop monitors the output voltage across CMAIN using R1/R2. The reference voltage from the DAC is subtracted, generating the raw error voltage. The raw error voltage is filtered by the OPAMP and routed to Comparator C1 in the inner current loop. The phase compensation output of the PSMC acts to improve loop stability by adding a pseudo-ramp waveform to the current sense transformer feedback in the inner loop. In conditions where the charge phase of the cycle is greater then 50%, the increased current feedback reduces the current charge in L1, slowing the charging of CMAIN. The result is a reduction in the overall loop gain for duty cycles of >50%, maintaining loop stability. The outer voltage feedback loop consists of: • • • • Diode D1 CMAIN OPAMP feedback filter DAC reference  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 107 PIC16C781.book Page 108 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 13-5: EXAMPLE BOOST CONFIGURATION LC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY +DCRAW PIC16C781/782 L1 MOSFET DRIVER RB6/C1/PSMC1A CURRENT TRANSFORMER A PSMC RB7/C2/PSMC1B R3 VDD SC D1 + Q1 LOAD CMAIN C1 RB3/AN7/OPA R1 R2 RA1/AN1/OPA- OPA RA4/AN0/OPA+ RA3/AN3/VREF1 C1 RB2/AN6 RB1/AN5/VDAC DAC VREF Note: The OPAMP, Comparator and DAC must be configured, prior to enabling the PSMC to prevent unpredictable operation which may stress the power MOSFET transistors. DS41171B-page 108 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 109 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 EXAMPLE 13-1: PSMC CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ;* This code block will configure the PSMC and ;* all additional peripherals for a boost mode ;* switching power supply. ;* ;* Order of configuration ;* 1. PORTA/B I/O and analog configured ;* 2. DAC enabled, configured, and preset ;* 3. Op Amp enabled and configured ;* 4. Comparator C1 enabled and configured ;* 5. PSMC configured ;* 6. PSMC enabled ********************************************************** ;* This code block will configure all analog ports. BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF TRISA B’00001011’ TRISA B’11001110’ TRISB B’11101011’ ANSEL ; Select Bank 1 ; Set RA0,1,& 3 as inputs ; Set RB1,2,3,6 & 7 as inputs ; Configure RA0, RA1, RA3, ; RB1, RB2, RB3 as analog ;********************************************************************** ;* This code block will configure the DAC for VDD as ;* DACREF, and RB1/AN5/VDAC as an output BANKSEL DACON0 ; Select Bank 2 CLRF MOVLW MOVWF DAC B’11000000’ DACON0 ; Set DAC to safe value ; Enable DAC, output ; and set DACREF = VDD MOVLW OUTPUT_VALUE MOVWF DAC ; Set DAC output level ;********************************************************************** ;* This code block will configure the OPA module as an ;* Op Amp, with a 2MHz GBWP MOVLW MOVWF B’10000001’ OPACON ; Set Op Amp mode and ; 2MHz GBWP ;************************************************************************* ;* This code block will configure Comparator C1 ;* for normal speed and output polarity, ;* input on AN6, and Reference from the VREF1 MOVLW MOVWF B’10001010 CM1CON0 ; Set C1, no ext out, norm ; speed & pol, VREF1, AN6 ;************************************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the PSMC module ;* for PWM, FOSC/128, Single in, Single pulse out, slope comp out ;* Non-inverting out, DC min = 0%, DC max = 75% MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF B’00001000’ PSMCCON0 B’00001010’ PSMCCON1 PSMCCON1,SMCON  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. ; ; ; ; Set DCmin 0, DCmax 75, FOSC/128 Set PWM Sngl in, Sngl out non-invert Slope comp Enable PSMC Preliminary DS41171B-page 109 PIC16C781.book Page 110 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.3.2 EXAMPLE BUCK LC SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY In this example, the PSMC controls the buck configuration switching power supply in Figure 13-6. The PSMC is configured as a typical PWM, current mode, switching power supply controller. The inner current feedback loops consist of: • • • • • • PSMC 2 MOSFET drivers Power MOSFETs Q1 and Q2 Inductors L1 and L2 Current transformer Comparator C1/C2 The outer voltage loop monitors the output voltage across CMAIN via R1/R2. The reference voltage from the DAC is subtracted from the feedback voltage to generate the raw error voltage. The raw error voltage is then filtered by the OPAMP and routed to Comparator C1 in the inner current loop. In using two alternating outputs, the outputs are limited to less than 50% duty cycle. As a result, the circuit avoids the problems associated with instability at duty cycles of >50%. For more information concerning the design of switching power supplies, refer to: Switching Power Supply Design, by Abraham I. Pressman, published by McGraw Hill (ISBN 0-07-052236-7). The outer voltage feedback loop consists of: • • • • Note: Diodes D1, D2, D3, and D4 CMAIN OPAMP feedback filter DAC reference The circuit uses two feedback loops, an inner current control loop, and an outer voltage loop. The inner loop is further divided into two channels, Q1/L1, and Q2/L2. The PSMC operates a PWM output, alternately driving Q1 for a cycle, then driving Q2 the next. During the active phase of either output pulse, the inner loop builds up a current flow in the output’s inductor, proportional to the error voltage received from the OPAMP. The current flow in the inductor begins the charging of CMAIN. When the voltage (proportional to the current flow in the inductor) exceeds the error voltage: • • • • Following RESET, both the PSMC1A and PSMC1B outputs are held tri-state until the PSMC is configured. Driver circuitry for all power MOSFET transistors must have a resistor bias to turn off the transistor in the event of tri-state conditions on either output to prevent undo stress on the MOSFET's and their associated circuitry. The comparator resets the PSMC output The MOSFET is turned off The flyback diode forward biases The inductor discharges into CMAIN for the remainder of the period. DS41171B-page 110 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 111 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 EXAMPLE 13-2: EXAMPLE PSMC CONFIGURATION FOR A BUCK MODE SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY ;* PSMC Initialization ;* This code block will configure the PSMC ;* and all additional peripherals for a buck ;* mode switching power supply. ;* ;* Order of configuration ;* 1. PORTA/B I/O and analog configured ;* 2. DAC enabled, configured, and preset ;* 3. Op Amp enabled and configured ;* 4. Comparator C1 enabled and configured ;* 5. PSMC configured ;* 6. PSMC enabled ;******************************************** ;* This code block will configure all analog ports. ; BANKSEL TRISA ; Select Bank 1 MOVLW B’00001011’ MOVWF TRISA ; Set RA0,1,& 3 as inputs MOVLW B’11001110 MOVWF TRISB ; Set RB1,2,3,6 & 7 as inputs MOVLW B’11101011’ MOVWF ANSEL ; Set AN0,1,3,5,6 & 7 as analog ;******************************************************* ;* This code block will configure the DAC for VDD as ;* DACREF, and RB1/AN5/VDAC as an output. BANKSEL DACON0 ; Select Bank 2 CLRF MOVLW MOVWF DAC B’11000000’ DACON0 ; Set DAC to safe value ; Enable DAC, output ; and set DACREF = VDD MOVLW MOVWF OUTPUT_VALUE DAC ; Set dAC output level ;******************************************************* ;* This code block will configure the OPA module ;* as an Op Amp, with a 3 MHZ GBWP MOVLW MOVWF B’10000001’ OPACON ; Set Op Amp mode and ; 2 MHz GBWP ;******************************************************** ;* This code block will configure Comparator C1 ;* for normal speed and output polarity, ;* input on AN6, and Reference from the VREF1 MOVLW MOVWF B’10001010’ CM1CON0 ; Set C1; no ext out, norm ; speed & pol, VREF1, AN6 ;******************************************************** ;* This code block will configure the PSMC module ;* for PWM, Fosc/128, Single input, Single output ;* Non-inverting out, DC min = 0%, DC max = 50% MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF B’0000000’ PSMCCON0 B’00000110’ PSMCCON1 PSMCCON1,SMCON  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. ; Set DCmin 0, DCmax 50, Fosc/128 ; Set PWM, 1 in, 2 out, noninvert ; Enable PSMC Preliminary DS41171B-page 111 PIC16C781.book Page 112 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 13-6: EXAMPLE BUCK CONFIGURATION LC POWER SUPPLY +VIN CURRENT TRANSFORMER PIC16C781/782 RB6/C1/PSMC1A MOSFET DRIVER Q1 L1 D3 A PSMC D1 RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G B CMAIN MOSFET DRIVER Q2 L2 D4 RA3/AN3/VREF1 + C1 - LOAD D2 RB2/AN6 R1 RB3/AN7/OPA RA1/AN1/OPA- R2 OPA + RA0/AN0/OPA+ RB1/AN5/VDAC VREF 13.3.3 DAC EXAMPLE MOTOR SPEED CONTROL The algorithm (used to determine the values output by the DAC module) depends on: In Figure 13-7, the PSMC acts as a speed control for a brushless DC motor. The direction of the current in the motor winding is set by feedback from a Hall effect position sensor on the motor. The sensor switches the phase in the motor in response to the rotation of the rotor so that the magnetic field rotates just ahead of the rotor, pulling it in the desired direction. The speed at which the rotor spins is a function of the mechanical load on the rotor and the current in the field winding. • mechanical system connected to the motor • motor characteristics • characteristics of the high current drive An analysis of the mechanics of the system and the design of an appropriate control algorithm is beyond the scope of this Data Sheet. Therefore, the designer should consult a text dealing with the design of motor speed controls and feedback control system, in general, for the necessary design guidance. Speed control is accomplished by monitoring the speed via the Hall effect sensor and regulating the current in the winding appropriately. The winding current is regulated by the PSMC to be proportional to the value supplied by the DAC module. The feedback loop is closed by software making periodic measurement of the rotor speed using the Hall Effect sensor/Timer1 and adjusting the output value of the DAC appropriately. DS41171B-page 112 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 113 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 EXAMPLE 13-3: PERIPHERAL CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE ************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the PSMC and ;* all additional peripherals for a motor speed ;* control. ;* ;* Order of configuration ;* 1. PORTA/B I/O and analog configured ;* 2. DAC enabled, configured, and preset ;* 3. Op Amp enabled and configured ;* 4. Comparator C1 enabled and configured ;* 5. PSMC configured ;* 6. PSMC enabled ;* ************************************************ ;* This code block will configure all analog ports. BANKSEL MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF TRISA B’01000011’ TRISA B’00001100’ TRISB B’11000011’ ANSEL ; Select Bank 1 ; Set RA0,1 & 6 as inputs ; Set RB2 & 3 as inputs ; Set AN0,1,6,& 7 as analog ;************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the DAC for VR as ;* DACREF, and no output. BANKSEL BSF BANKSEL REFCON REFCON, VREN DACON0 ; Enable VR ; Select Bank 2 CLRF MOVLW MOVWF DAC B’10000010’ DACON0 ; Set DAC to safe value ; Enable DAC, no output ; and set DACREF = VR MOVLW MOVWF OUTPUT_VALUE DAC ; Set DAC output level ;************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the OPA module ;* as an Op Amp, with a 2 MHz GBWP MOVLW MOVWF B’10000001’ OPACON ; Set Op Amp mode and ; 2 MHz GBWP ;************************************************ * This code block will configure Comparator C1 * for normal speed and output polarity, * input on AN6, and Reference from the VDAC MOVLW MOVWF B’10001110’ CM1CON0 ; Set C1; no ext out, norm ; speed & pol, VDAC, AN6 ;************************************************ ;* This code block will configure the PSMC module ;* for PWM, Fosc/16, Single input, Single output ;* Non-inverting out, DC min = 0%, DC max = 94% MOVLW MOVWF MOVLW MOVWF BSF B’11001100’ PSMCCON0 B’00000010’ PSMCCON1 PSMCCON1,SMCON  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. ; Set DCmin 0, DCmax 94, Fosc/16 ; Set PWM, Sngl in/out, noninvert ; Enable PSMC Preliminary DS41171B-page 113 PIC16C781.book Page 114 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 13-7: EXAMPLE BRUSHLESS D.C. MOTOR CONTROL VMOTOR PIC16C781/782 BRUSHLESS H-BRIDGE DRIVER FOSC /16 ENABLE Q S D.C. MOTOR HALL EFFECT SENSOR RB6/C1/PSMC1A PHASE R RSENSE RB2/AN6 C1 RB3/AN7/OPA RA0/AN0/OPA+ OPA RA1/AN1/OPA- VREF FIRMWARE FEEDBACK CONTROL DAC RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI TIMER 1 DS41171B-page 114 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 115 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 13.4 Effects of SLEEP and RESET Placing the PIC16C781/782 into SLEEP mode will stop the main oscillator for the microcontroller. The PSMC derives its timing from the main oscillator. Therefore, operation of the PSMC will halt when the microcontroller enters SLEEP mode. To prevent damage, the outputs of the PSMC are gated so that they are driven to their inactive state whenever the device enters SLEEP mode. When the microcontroller wakes up, the PSMC resumes operation per its previously programmed configuration. A device RESET forces all registers to their RESET state. This disables the PSMC and resets its outputs to digital inputs. It is good design practice to include a failsafe resistor bias in all power transistor drive circuitry. The fail-safe circuit should disable the power device when the PSMC output drive transistor is held tri-state. This protects the power device and its associated circuitry from the stress of prolonged operation without feedback. TABLE 13-6: Address REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH THE PSMC Name 86h,186h TRISB Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 PORTB Data Direction Register Value on: POR, BOR Value on all other RESETS 1111 1111 1111 1111 11Ah CM2CON0 C2ON C2OUT C2OE C2POL C2SP C2R C2CH1 C2CH0 0000 0000 0000 0000 119h CM1CON0 C1ON C1OUT C1OE C1POL C1SP C1R C1CH1 C1CH0 0000 0000 0000 0000 111h PSMCCON0 SMCCL1 SMCCL0 MINDC1 MINDC0 MAXDC1 MAXDC0 DC1 DC0 0000 0000 0000 0000 112h PSMCCON1 SMCON S1APOL S1BPOL — SCEN SMCOM PWM/PSM SMCCS 000- 0000 000- 0000 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, read as '0'. Shaded cells are not used for PSMC.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 115 PIC16C781.book Page 116 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 116 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 117 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.0 SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE CPU These devices have a host of features intended to maximize system reliability, minimize cost through elimination of external components, provide power saving operating modes and offer code protection. These features include: • Oscillator selection • RESET - Power-on Reset (POR) - Power-up Timer (PWRT) - Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) - Programmable Brown-out Reset (PBOR) • Interrupts • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Programmable Low Voltage Detection (PLVD) • SLEEP • Code protection • ID locations • In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) Note: Address 2007h is beyond the user program memory space, which can be accessed only during programming. Some of the core features provided may not be necessary for each application in which a device may be used. The configuration word bits allow these features to be configured/enabled/disabled as necessary. These features include: • • • • • Code Protection PBOR Trip Point Power-up Timer Watchdog Timer Device Oscillator Mode As can be seen in Table 14-1, some additional configuration word bits have been provided for Brown-out Reset trip point selection. Several oscillator options are available to allow the part to fit the application. The INTRC oscillator options save system cost while the LP crystal option saves power. A set of configuration bits is used to select various options. The CPU also features a Watchdog Timer (WDT), which can be enabled either through a configuration bit during programming, or by the software. For added reliability, the WDT runs off its own internal RC oscillator instead of the main CPU clock. In addition to the WDT, the CPU incorporates both an Oscillator Start-up Timer and a Power-up Timer. The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is intended to hold the chip in RESET until the crystal oscillator has stabilized. The Power-up Timer (PWRT) holds the CPU in a fixed RESET delay of 72ms (nominal) on Power-up Resets (POR and PBOR), while the power supply stabilizes. With these two timers on-chip, most applications need no external RESET circuitry. SLEEP mode is designed to offer a very low current power-down mode. The user can awaken from SLEEP through: • External RESET • Watchdog Timer Wake-up • Interrupt Additional information on special features is available in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, (DS33023). 14.1 Configuration Bits The configuration bits can be programmed (read as '0'), or left unprogrammed (read as '1'), to select various device configurations. These bits are mapped in program memory location 2007h.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 117 PIC16C781.book Page 118 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 14-1: CP CP CONFIGURATION WORD FOR PIC16C781/782 DEVICE (CONFIG:2007h) BORV1 BORV0 CP CP — BODEN MCLRE PWRTE WDTE F0SC2 F0SC1 bit13 F0SC0 bit0 bit 13-12, 9-8 CP: Program Memory Code Protection bits 1 = Code Protection off 0 = All program memory is protected(1) bit 11-10 BORV: Brown-out Reset Voltage bits 00 = PBOR set to 4.5V 01 = PBOR set to 4.2V 10 = PBOR set to 2.7V 11 = PBOR set to 2.5V bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘1’ bit 6 BODEN: Brown-out Detect Reset Enable bit(1) 1 = Brown-out Detect Reset enabled 0 = Brown-out Detect Reset disabled bit 5 MCLRE: RA5/MCLR Pin Function Select bit 1 = RA5/MCLR pin function is MCLR 0 = RA5/MCLR pin function is digital input, MCLR internally tied to VDD bit 4 PWRTE: Power-up Timer Enable bit(1) 1 = PWRT disabled 0 = PWRT enabled bit 3 WDTE: Watchdog Timer Enable bit 1 = WDT enabled 0 = WDT disabled bit 2-0 FOSC: Oscillator Selection bits FOSC 000 OSCILLATOR RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI LP Crystal/Resonator RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Crystal/Resonator 001 XT Crystal/Resonator Crystal/Resonator 010 HS Crystal/Resonator Crystal/Resonator 011 EC Digital I/O CLKIN 100 INTRC Digital I/O Digital I/O 101 INTRC CLKOUT Digital I/O 110 RC Digital I/O RC 111 RC CLKOUT RC Note 1: All of the CP bits must be given the same value to enable code protection. DS41171B-page 118 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 119 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.2 Oscillator Configurations 14.2.1 TABLE 14-1: OSCILLATOR TYPES Ranges Tested: The PIC16C781/782 can be operated in eight different oscillator modes. The user can program three configuration bits FOSC to select one of these eight modes: • • • • LP XT HS RC Low Power Crystal Crystal/Resonator High Speed Crystal/Resonator External Resistor and Capacitor (with and without CLKOUT) • INTRC Internal 4 MHz/37 kHz (with and without CLKOUT) • EC External Clock 14.2.2 Mode Freq In LP, XT, or HS modes, a crystal or ceramic resonator is connected to the RA7/OSC1/CLKIN and RA6/OSC2/ CLKOUT/T1CKI pins to establish oscillation (Figure 14-1). The PIC16C781/782 oscillator design requires the use of a parallel cut crystal. Use of a series cut crystal may yield a frequency outside of the crystal manufacturers’ specifications. C1(1) CRYSTAL/CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (HS, XT OR LP OSC CONFIGURATION) PIC16C781/782 RA7/OSC1/ CLKIN To Internal Logic XTAL RA6/OSC2 CLKOUT/ T1CKI RF(3) SLEEP Rs(2) C2(1) C2 455 kHz 68 - 100 pF 68 - 100 pF 2.0 MHz 15 - 68 pF 15 - 68 pF 4.0 MHz 15 - 68 pF 15 - 68 pF HS 8.0 MHz 10 - 68 pF 10 - 68 pF 16.0 MHz 10 - 22 pF 10 - 22 pF These values are for design guidance only. See Notes 1 and 2 in shaded box. In this test, all resonators used did not have built-in capacitors. TABLE 14-2: Osc Type LP XT HS CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR Crystal Freq Cap. Range C1 Cap. Range C2 32 kHz 33 pF 200 kHz 15 pF 33 pF 15 pF 200 kHz 47-68 pF 47-68 pF 1 MHz 15 pF 15 pF 4 MHz 15 pF 15 pF 4 MHz 15 pF 15 pF 8 MHz 15-33 pF 15-33 pF 20 MHz 15-33 pF 15-33 pF These values are for design guidance only. See Notes 1 and 2 in shaded box. Note 1: Since each resonator/crystal has its own characteristics, the user should consult the resonator/crystal manufacturer for appropriate values of external components. 2: Higher capacitance increases the stability of oscillator but also increases the start-up time. Note 1: See Table 14-1 and Table 14-2 for recommended values of C1 and C2. 2: A series resistor (RS) may be required for AT strip cut crystals. C1 XT LP, XT AND HS MODES FIGURE 14-1: CERAMIC RESONATORS 14.2.3 EC MODE 3: RF varies with the crystal chosen. In applications where the clock source is external, the PIC16C781/782 should be programmed to select the EC (External Clock) mode. In this mode, the RA6/ OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI pin is available as an I/O pin. See Figure 14-2 for illustration. To minimize power supply current drawn, the EC oscillator input should be driven by a CMOS level square wave.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 119 PIC16C781.book Page 120 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 14-2: EC OSC CONFIGURATION RA7 FIGURE 14-3: RC OSCILLATOR MODE VDD PIC16C781/782 PIC16C781/782 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Clock from ext. system REXT I/O RA7/OSC1/ CLKIN RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/ T1CKI Internal Clock CEXT 14.2.4 VSS RC MODE FOSC/4 For timing insensitive applications, the RC device option offers additional cost savings. The RC oscillator frequency is a function of: 14.2.5 • supply voltage • resistor (REXT) and capacitor (CEXT) values • operating temperature In addition, the oscillator frequency varies from unit to unit due to normal process variation. The difference in lead frame capacitance between package types also affects the oscillation frequency, especially for low CEXT values. The user should allow for variations due to tolerance of external R and C components used. Figure 14-3 shows how the RC combination is connected to the PIC16C781/782. For REXT values below 2.2 k, the oscillator operation may become unstable or stop completely. For very high REXT values (e.g., 1 Mor greater), the oscillator becomes sensitive to: • noise • humidity • leakage Microchip recommends keeping REXT between 3 k and 100 k. Although the oscillator will operate with no external capacitor (CEXT = 0 pF), we recommend using values above 20 pF for noise and stability reasons. With no or small external capacitance, the oscillation frequency can vary dramatically due to changes in external capacitances, such as board trace capacitance or package lead frame capacitance. RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/I1CKI INTRC MODE The internal RC oscillator provides a fixed 4 MHz/37 kHz (nominal) system clock at VDD = 5V and 25°C. See Section 18.0 for information on variations over voltage and temperature ranges. The INTRC oscillator does not run during RESET. 14.2.6 DUAL SPEED OPERATION FOR INTRC MODE A software programmable slow speed mode is available with the INTRC oscillator. This feature allows the firmware to dynamically toggle the oscillator speed between normal and slow frequencies. The nominal slow frequency is 37 kHz. Applications that require low current power savings, but cannot tolerate putting the part into SLEEP, may use this mode. The OSCF bit (PCON) is used to control dual speed mode. See the PCON Register, Register 2-6, for details. When changing the INTRC internal oscillator speed, there is a brief period of time when the processor is inactive. When the speed changes from fast to slow, the processor inactive period is in the range of 100 S to 300 S. For a speed change from slow to fast, the processor is inactive between 1.25 S and 3.25 S, nominal. See Section 18.0 for RC frequency variation from part to part due to normal process variation. The variation is greater for large values of R (since leakage current variations affect RC frequency more for large R) and for small values of C (since variations of input capacitance affect RC frequency more). 14.2.7 See Section 18.0 for variation of oscillator frequency due to VDD for given REXT and CEXT values (or for frequency variation due to operating temperature for given R, C, and VDD values). In the INTRC and RC modes, if the CLKOUT output is enabled, CLKOUT is held low during RESET. DS41171B-page 120 CLKOUT In the INTRC and RC modes, the PIC16C781/782 can be configured to provide a clock out signal by programming the configuration word. The oscillator frequency, divided by 4, can be used for test purposes or to synchronize other logic. Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 121 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.3 RESET The PIC16C781/782 devices have several different RESETS. These RESETS are grouped into two classifications: power-up and non power-up. The power-up type RESETS are the Power-on and Brown-out Resets, which assume the device VDD was below its normal operating range for the device’s configuration. The non power-up type RESETS assume normal operating limits were maintained before/during and after the RESET. • Power-on Reset (POR) • Programmable Brown-out Reset (PBOR) • Non Power-up (MCLR) Reset during normal operation • MCLR Reset during SLEEP • WDT Reset (during normal operation) FIGURE 14-4: Some registers are not affected in any RESET condition. Their status is unknown on a Power-up Reset and unchanged in any other RESET. Most other registers are placed into an initialized state upon RESET. However, they are not affected by a WDT Reset during SLEEP, because this is considered a WDT Wake-up, which is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Several status bits have been provided to indicate which RESET occurred (see Table 14-4). See Table 14-5 for a full description of RESET states of special registers. A simplified block diagram of the On-Chip Reset Circuit is shown in Figure 14-4. These devices have a MCLR noise filter in the MCLR Reset path. The filter detects and ignores small pulses. It should be noted that a WDT Reset does not drive MCLR pin low. SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT RA5/MCLR/VPP External RESET SLEEP WDT Time-out Module VDD VDD Rise Detect Power-on Reset Programmable BODEN Brown-out RA7/OSC1/ CLKIN S OST/PWRT OST 10-bit Ripple Counter R Q Chip_Reset PWRT Dedicated Oscillator 10-bit Ripple Counter Enable PWRT Enable OST  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 121 PIC16C781.book Page 122 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.4 Power-on Reset (POR) 14.5 A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip when a VDD rise is detected (in the range of 1.5V - 2.1V). To take advantage of the POR, simply enable the internal MCLR feature. This eliminates external RC components usually needed to create a Power-on Reset. A maximum rise time for VDD is specified. See Section 17.0 for details. For a slow rise time, see Figure 14-5. Two delay timers (PWRT on OST) are provided, which hold the device in RESET after a POR (dependent upon device configuration), so that all operational parameters have been met prior to releasing the device to resume/begin normal operation. When the device starts normal operation (exits the RESET condition), device operating parameters (i.e., voltage, frequency, temperature,...) must be met to ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the device must be held in RESET until the operating conditions are met. Brown-out Reset may be used to meet the start-up conditions, or if necessary an external POR circuit may be implemented to delay end of RESET for as long as needed. FIGURE 14-5: EXTERNAL POWER-ON RESET CIRCUIT (FOR SLOW VDD RAMP) VDD VDD PIC16C781/782 D R R1 MCLR C Note 1: External Power-on Reset circuit is required only if VDD power-up slope is too slow. The diode D helps discharge the capacitor quickly when VDD powers down. 2: R < 40 k is recommended to make sure that voltage drop across R does not violate the device’s electrical specification. 3: R1 = 100 to 1 k will limit any current flowing into MCLR from external capacitor C in the event of MCLR pin breakdown due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical Overstress (EOS). Power-up Timer (PWRT) The Power-up Timer provides a fixed TPWRT time-out on power-up type RESETS only. For a POR, the PWRT is invoked when the POR pulse is generated. For a BOR, the PWRT is invoked when the device exits the RESET condition (VDD rises above BOR trip point). The Power-up Timer operates on an internal RC oscillator. The chip is kept in RESET as long as the PWRT is active. The PWRT’s time delay is designed to allow VDD to rise to an acceptable level. A configuration bit (PWRT) is provided to enable/disable the PWRT for the POR only. For a BOR the PWRT is always available regardless of the configuration bit setting. The power-up time delay varies from chip-to-chip due to VDD, temperature and process variation. See DC parameters for details. 14.6 Programmable Brown-out Reset (PBOR) The Programmable Brown-out Reset module is used to generate a RESET when the supply voltage falls below a specified trip voltage. The trip voltage is configurable to any one of four voltages provided by the BORV configuration word bits. Configuration bit BODEN can disable (if clear/programmed), or enable (if set), the Brown-out Reset circuitry. If VDD falls below the specified trip point for longer than TBOR (see Parameter 35, Section 17.0, Table 17-6), the brown-out situation resets the chip. A RESET may not occur if VDD falls below the trip point for less than TBOR. The chip remains in Brown-out Reset until VDD rises above VBOR. The Power-up Timer is invoked at that point and keeps the chip in RESET an additional TPWRT. If VDD drops below VBOR while the Power-up Timer is running, the chip goes back into a Brown-out Reset and the Power-up Timer is reinitialized. Once VDD rises above VBOR, the Power-up Timer again begins a TPWRT time delay. 14.7 Time-out Sequence On power-up, the time-out sequence is as follows: First, PWRT time-out is invoked by the POR pulse. When the PWRT delay expires, the Oscillator Start-up Timer is activated. The total time-out varies depending on oscillator configuration and the status of the PWRT. For example, in RC mode with the PWRT disabled, there is no time-out at all. Figure 14-6, and Figure 14-9 depict time-out sequences on power-up. Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR is kept low long enough, the time-outs expire. Then, bringing MCLR high begins execution immediately. This is useful for testing purposes or to synchronize more than one PIC microcontroller operating in parallel. Table 14-5 shows the RESET conditions for some special function registers. DS41171B-page 122 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 123 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.8 Power Control/Status Register (PCON) Clearing the OSCF (PCON) enables oscillation at 37kHz, setting OSCF returns the oscillator to operation at 4MHz. The Power Control/Status Register, PCON, has two status bits that provide indication of which power-up type RESET occurred. The Watchdog Timer is a free running, on-chip dedicated oscillator and timer, which does not require any external components to operate. The WDT provides a system RESET in the event that software does not execute a CLRWDT instruction within a specified interval. For reliability, the WDT will run even if the CPU clock has been stopped (for example, by the execution of a SLEEP instruction). PCON is Brown-out Reset Status bit, BOR. Bit BOR is set on a Power-on Reset. It must then be set by the user and checked on subsequent RESETS to see if bit BOR cleared, indicating a BOR occurred. However, if the brown-out circuitry is disabled, the BOR bit is a "Don’t Care" bit and is considered unknown upon a POR. During normal operation, a WDT time-out generates a device RESET (Watchdog Timer Reset). If the device is in SLEEP mode, a WDT time-out causes the device to awaken and resume normal operation (Watchdog Timer Wake-up). PCON is POR (Power-on Reset Status bit). It is cleared on a Power-on Reset and unaffected otherwise. The user must set this bit following a Power-on Reset. The WDT can be enabled either by setting the WDTE bit in the configuration register during programming, or by setting the WDTON bit (PCON). When the CPU is running under the INTRC oscillator mode, the frequency of the INTRC oscillator can be switched to a power saving 37 kHz (nominal) mode. TABLE 14-3: TIME-OUT IN VARIOUS SITUATIONS Power-up Brown-out Wake-up from SLEEP 1024TOSC TPWRT + 1024TOSC 1024TOSC — TPWRT — Oscillator Configuration XT, HS, LP PWRTE = 0 PWRTE = 1 TPWRT + 1024TOSC TPWRT EC, RC, INTRC  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 123 PIC16C781.book Page 124 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 REGISTER 14-2: POWER CONTROL REGISTER (PCON: 8Eh) U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-q R/W-1 U-0 R/W-q R/W-x — — — WDTON OSCF — POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 4 WDTON: WDT Software Enable bit If WDTE bit (Configuration Word ) = 1: This bit is not writable, always reads ‘1’ If WDTE bit (Configuration Word ) = 0: 1 = WDT is enabled 0 = WDT is disabled and cleared bit 3 OSCF: Oscillator Speed bit (pending on new internal oscillator decision) INTRC mode: 1 = 4 MHz typical 0 = 37 kHz typical All other oscillator modes: Ignored bit 2 Unimplemented: Read as '0' bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = No Brown-out Reset occurred 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs) Legend: TABLE 14-4: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ - n = Value at POR ’1’ = Bit is set ’0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown ’q’ = Value depends on condition STATUS BITS AND THEIR SIGNIFICANCE POR BOR TO PD 0 1 1 1 Power-on Reset Bit Significance 0 x 0 x Illegal, TO is set on POR 0 x x 0 Illegal, PD is set on POR 1 0 1 1 Brown-out Reset 1 1 0 1 WDT Reset 1 1 0 0 WDT Wake-up 1 1 u u MCLR Reset during normal operation 1 1 1 0 MCLR Reset during SLEEP or interrupt wake-up from SLEEP DS41171B-page 124 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 125 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 14-5: RESET CONDITION FOR SPECIAL REGISTERS Program Counter STATUS Register PCON Register Power-on Reset 000h 0001 1xxx ---0 1-01 MCLR Reset during normal operation 000h 000u uuuu ---0 1-uu MCLR Reset during SLEEP 000h 0001 0uuu ---0 1-uu WDT Reset 000h 0000 1uuu ---0 1-uu PC + 1 uuu0 0uuu ---0 u-uu Condition WDT Wake-up Brown-out Reset 000h 0001 1uuu ---0 1-u0 Interrupt wake-up from SLEEP, GIE = 0 PC + 1 uuu1 0uuu ---u u-uu Interrupt wake-up from SLEEP, GIE = 1 0004h uuu1 0uuu ---u u-uu Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as '0'. FIGURE 14-6: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT TOST OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 14-7: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT TOST OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 125 PIC16C781.book Page 126 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 14-6: INITIALIZATION CONDITION FOR ALL REGISTERS Register Power-On Reset or Brown-Out Reset MCLR Reset or WDT Reset Wake-up via WDT or Interrupt W (not a mapped register) INDF TMR0 xxxx xxxx 0000 0000 xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PCL 0000 0000 0000 0000 PC + 1(1) quuu(2) STATUS 0001 1xxx 000q uuuq quuu(2) FSR xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PORTA xxxx 0000 uuuu 0000 uuuu uuuu PORTB xxxx xx00 uuuu uu00 uuuu uu00 PCLATH ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu INTCON 0000 000x 0000 000u uuuu uuqq PIR1 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 0000 ---u CALCON 000- ---000- ---uuu- ---TMR1L xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu TMR1H xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu T1CON -000 0000 -uuu uuuu -uuu uuuu PSMCCON0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu PSMCCON1 000- 0000 000- 0000 uuu- uuuu CM1CON0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CM2CON0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu CM2CON1 00-- ---0 00-- ---0 uu-- ---u OPACON 00-- ---0 00-- ---0 uu-- ---u ADRES xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu ADCON0 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu OPTION_REG 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISA 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu TRISB 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu PIE1 0000 ---0 0000 ---0 uuuu ---u PCON ---0 1-qq ---0 1-uu ---u u-uu DAC 0000 0000 0000 0000 uuuu uuuu DACON0 00-- --00 00-- --00 uu-- --uu WPUB 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu IOCB 1111 0000 1111 0000 uuuu uuuu REFCON ---- 00----- 00----- uu-LVDCON --00 0101 --00 0101 --uu uuuu ANSEL 1111 1111 1111 1111 uuuu uuuu ADCON1 --00 -----00 -----uu ---PMDATL xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PMADRL xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu uuuu uuuu PMDATH --xx xxxx --uu uuuu --uu uuuu PMADRH ---- xxxx ---- uuuu ---- uuuu PMCON1 1--- ---0 1--- ---0 1--- ---0 Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as '0', q = value depends on condition Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIE bit is set, the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector (0004h). 2: See Table 14-5 for RESET value for specific condition. DS41171B-page 126 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 127 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 14-8: TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD) VDD MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT PWRT TIME-OUT TOST OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET FIGURE 14-9: SLOW VDD RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD) 5V VDD 0V MCLR INTERNAL POR TPWRT (1) PWRT TIME-OUT TOST OST TIME-OUT INTERNAL RESET Note 1: This time depends on the oscillator circuit used.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 127 PIC16C781.book Page 128 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.9 Interrupts When an interrupt is serviced, the GIE bit is cleared to disable any further interrupt. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with 0004h. Once in the Interrupt Service Routine the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bit(s) must be cleared in software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid recursive interrupts. The devices have up to eight sources of interrupt. The interrupt control register (INTCON) records individual interrupt requests in flag bits. It also has individual and global interrupt enable bits. Note: Individual interrupt flag bits are set, regardless of the status of their corresponding mask bit or the GIE bit. For external interrupt events, such as the INT pin or PORTB change interrupt, the interrupt latency is three or four instruction cycles. The exact latency depends on when the interrupt event occurs. The latency is the same for one or two-cycle instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set, regardless of the status of their corresponding mask bit or the GIE bit. A global interrupt enable bit, GIE (INTCON), enables (if set) all unmasked interrupts or disables (if cleared) all interrupts. When bit GIE is enabled and an interrupt’s flag bit and mask bit are set, the interrupt will vector immediately. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding enable bits in various registers. Individual interrupt bits are set, regardless of the status of the GIE bit. The GIE bit is cleared on RESET. 14.9.1 The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine as well as sets the GIE bit, which re-enables interrupts. The RB0/INT/AN4/VR pin interrupt, the RB port Interrupt-on-Change (IOCB) and the TMR0 overflow interrupt flags are contained in the INTCON register. The peripheral interrupt flags are contained in the special function register PIR1. The corresponding interrupt enable bits are contained in special function register PIE1, and the peripheral interrupt enable bit is contained in special function register INTCON. FIGURE 14-10: INTERRUPT LOGIC T0IF T0IE LVDIF LVDIE INTF INTE C2IF C2IE RBIF RBIE C1IF C1IE ADIF ADIE INT INTERRUPT External interrupt on RB0/INT/AN4/VR pin is edge triggered: either rising, if bit INTEDG (OPTION_REG) is set, or falling, if the INTEDG bit is clear. When a valid edge appears on the RB0/INT pin, flag bit INTF (INTCON) is set. This interrupt can be disabled by clearing enable bit INTE (INTCON). Flag bit INTF must be cleared in software in the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling this interrupt. The INT interrupt can awaken the processor from SLEEP, if bit INTE was set prior to going into SLEEP. The status of global interrupt enable bit GIE decides whether or not the processor branches to the interrupt vector following a wake-up sequence. See Section 14.12 for details on SLEEP mode. Wake-up (If in SLEEP mode) Interrupt to CPU PEIF PEIE GIE TMR1IF TMR1IE DS41171B-page 128 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 129 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.9.2 TMR0 INTERRUPT EXAMPLE 14-1: An overflow (FFh  00h) in the TMR0 register sets the flag bit, T0IF (INTCON). The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, T0IE (INTCON) (Section 2.5). 14.9.3 PORTB INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE (IOCB) An input change on PORTB sets flag bit RBIF (INTCON). The PORTB pin(s) which can individually generate interrupt are selectable in the IOCB register. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/ clearing enable bit RBIE (INTCON) (Section 2.5). PORTB must be configured as a digital input. 14.10 Context Saving During Interrupts During an interrupt, only the PC is saved on the stack. At minimum, W and STATUS should be saved to preserve the context for the interrupted program. All registers that may be corrupted by the Interrupt Service Routine (ISR), such as PCLATH or FSR, should be saved. Example 14-1 stores and restores the STATUS, W and PCLATH registers. The register, W_TEMP, is defined in Common RAM, the last 16 bytes of each bank that may be accessed from any bank. The STATUS_TEMP and PCLATH_TEMP are defined in bank 0. Stores the W register. Stores the STATUS register in bank 0. Stores the PCLATH register in bank 0. Executes the ISR code. Restores the PCLATH register. Restores the STATUS register. Restores W. Note: #define W_TEMP 0x70 #define STATUS_TEMP 0x71 #define PCLATH_TEMP 0x72 org 0x04 ; Int Vector MOVWF W_TEMP ; Save W MOVF STATUS,w MOVWF STATUS_TEMP ; save STATUS MOVF PCLATH,w MOVWF PCLATH_TEMP ; save PCLATH : (Interrupt Service Routine) : MOVF PCLATH_TEMP,w MOVWF PCLATH MOVF STATUS_TEMP,w MOVWF STATUS SWAPF W_TEMP,f ; swapf loads W SWAPF W_TEMP,w ; w/o affect STATUS RETFIE 14.11 Watchdog Timer (WDT) The Watchdog Timer uses a free running, on-chip RC oscillator, which does not require any external components. This oscillator is independent from the processor clock. The WDT runs even if the main clock of the device has been stopped (for example, by execution of a SLEEP instruction). During normal operation, a WDT time-out generates a device RESET (Watchdog Timer Reset). If the device is in SLEEP mode, a WDT time-out causes the device to wake-up and continue with normal operation (Watchdog Timer Wake-up). The TO bit in the STATUS register is cleared upon a Watchdog Timer time-out. The example: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) SAVING STATUS, W, AND PCLATH REGISTERS The WDT can be permanently enabled by programming the configuration bit WDTE, or by software via the WDTON bit in the Power Control register (PCON: 8EH). See Section 14.8 and Section 14.1. The W_TEMP, STATUS_TEMP and PCLATH_TEMP are defined in the common RAM area (70h - 7Fh) to avoid register bank switching during context save and restore. WDT time-out period values may be found in the Electrical Specifications. Values for the WDT prescaler may be assigned using the OPTION_REG register. Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions clear the WDT and the postscaler, if assigned to the WDT. 2: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed and the prescaler is assigned to the WDT, the prescaler count is cleared, but the prescaler assignment is not changed.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 129 PIC16C781.book Page 130 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 14-11: WATCHDOG TIMER BLOCK DIAGRAM From TMR0 Clock Source (Figure 5-2) WDTE(2) 0 WDT Timer WDTON(3) Postscaler M 1 U X 8 PS(1) 8 - to - 1 MUX PSA(1) To TMR0 (Figure 5-2) 0 1 PSA(1) MUX WDT Time-out Note 1: PSA and PS are bits in the OPTION_REG register. 2: WDTE bit in the configuration word. 3: WDTON bit in the PCON register. TABLE 14-7: Address SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS Name Bits(1) 2007h Config. 81h,181h OPTION_REG 8Eh PCON Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 FOSC0 — BODEN MCLRE PWRTE WDTE FOSC2 FOSC1 RBPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 — — — WDTON OCSF — BOR POR Legend: Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer. Note 1: See Register 14-1 for the full description of the Configuration Word bits. DS41171B-page 130 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 131 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 14.12 Power-down Mode (SLEEP) Power-down mode is entered by executing a SLEEP instruction. If enabled, the Watchdog Timer is cleared but keeps running, the PD bit (STATUS) is cleared, the TO (STATUS) bit is set, and the oscillator driver is turned off. The I/O ports maintain the status they had, before the SLEEP instruction was executed (driving high, low, or hi-impedance). For lowest current consumption in this mode: • place all I/O pins at either VDD, or VSS, • ensure no external circuitry is drawing current from the I/O pin, • power-down all peripherals, • disable external clocks. WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The device can wake-up from SLEEP through one of the following events: 1. 2. 3. External RESET input on MCLR pin. Watchdog Timer Wake-up (if WDT was enabled). Interrupt from INT pin, PORTB IOCB, or any Peripheral Interrupts. External MCLR Reset causes a device RESET. All other events are considered a continuation of program execution and cause a "wake-up". The TO and PD bits in the STATUS register can be used to determine the cause of device RESET. The PD bit, which is set on power-up, is cleared when SLEEP is invoked. The TO bit is cleared if a WDT time-out occurred (and caused wake-up). The following peripheral interrupts can wake the device from SLEEP: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. When the SLEEP instruction is being executed, the next instruction (PC + 1) is pre-fetched. For the device to wake-up through an interrupt event, the corresponding interrupt enable bit must be set (enabled). Wake-up is regardless of the state of the GIE bit. If the GIE bit is clear (disabled), the device continues execution at the instruction after the SLEEP instruction. If the GIE bit is set (enabled), the device executes the instruction after the SLEEP instruction, then branches to the interrupt address (0004h). In cases where the execution of the instruction following SLEEP is not desirable, the user should have a NOP after the SLEEP instruction. 14.12.2 Pull all I/O pins that are hi-impedance inputs, high or low externally to avoid switching currents caused by floating inputs. The T0CKI input should also be at VDD or VSS for lowest current consumption. The contribution from onchip pull-ups on PORTB should be considered. 14.12.1 Other peripherals cannot generate interrupts since during SLEEP, no on-chip clocks are present. WAKE-UP USING INTERRUPTS When global interrupts are disabled (GIE cleared) and any interrupt source has both its interrupt enable bit and interrupt flag bit set, one of the following will occur: • If the interrupt occurs before the execution of a SLEEP instruction, the SLEEP instruction completes as a NOP. Therefore, the WDT and WDT postscaler are not cleared, the TO bit is not set, and PD bits are not cleared. • If the interrupt occurs during or after the execution of a SLEEP instruction, the device immediately awakens from SLEEP. The SLEEP instruction will be completely executed before the wake-up. Therefore, the WDT and WDT postscaler are cleared, the TO bit is set, and the PD bit is cleared. Even if the flag bits were checked before executing a SLEEP instruction, it may be possible for flag bits to become set before the SLEEP instruction completes. To determine whether a SLEEP instruction executed, test the PD bit. If the PD bit is set, the SLEEP instruction was executed as a NOP. To ensure that the WDT is cleared, a CLRWDT instruction should be executed before a SLEEP instruction. TMR1 interrupt. Timer1 must be operating as an asynchronous counter. ADC conversion (when ADC clock source is RC). Programmable low voltage detect. Comparator C1 or C2 interrupt-on-change. OPA in Comparator mode using IOCB.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 131 PIC16C781.book Page 132 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 14-12: WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP THROUGH INTERRUPT Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 OSC1 TOST(1) CLKOUT(3) INT pin INTF flag (INTCON) GIE bit (INTCON) Interrupt Latency(2) Processor in SLEEP INSTRUCTION FLOW PC Instruction Fetched Instruction Executed Note 1: 2: 3: PC Inst(PC) = SLEEP Inst(PC - 1) PC+1 PC+2 PC+2 Inst(PC + 1) Inst(PC + 2) SLEEP Inst(PC + 1) PC + 2 Dummy cycle 0004h 0005h Inst(0004h) Inst(0005h) Dummy cycle Inst(0004h) TOST = 1024TOSC (drawing not to scale). This delay applies to LP, XT and HS modes only. GIE = '1' assumed. In this case after wake- up, the processor jumps to the interrupt routine. If GIE = '0', execution will continue in-line. CLKOUT is not available in these osc modes, but shown here for timing reference. DS41171B-page 132 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 133 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 15.0 INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY Each PIC16CXXX instruction is a 14-bit word divided into an OPCODE which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands which further specify the operation of the instruction. The PIC16CXXX instruction set summary in Table 15-2 lists byte-oriented, bitoriented, and literal and control operations. Table 151 shows the opcode field descriptions. For byte-oriented instructions, 'f' represents a file register designator and 'd' represents a destination designator. The file register designator specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If 'd' is zero, the result is placed in the W register. If 'd' is one, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. All instructions are executed within one single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction. In this case, the execution takes two instruction cycles with the second cycle executed as a NOP. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 s. If a conditional test is true or the program counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 s. Table 15-2 lists the instructions recognized by the MPASMTM assembler. Figure 15-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. Note: To maintain upward compatibility with future PIC16CXXX products, do not use the OPTION and TRIS instructions. For bit-oriented instructions, 'b' represents a bit field designator which selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while 'f' represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. All examples use the following format to represent a hexadecimal number: For literal and control operations, 'k' represents an eight or eleven bit constant or literal value. where h signifies a hexadecimal digit. TABLE 15-1: Field f W b k x d PC TO PD 0xhh FIGURE 15-1: OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS Byte-oriented file register operations 13 8 7 6 OPCODE d f (FILE #) Description Register file address (0x00 to 0x7F) Working register (accumulator) Bit address within an 8-bit file register Literal field, constant data or label Don't care location (= 0 or 1) The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. Destination select; d = 0: store result in W, d = 1: store result in file register f. Default is d = 1 Program Counter Time-out bit Power-down bit 0 d = 0 for destination W d = 1 for destination f f = 7-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 13 10 9 7 6 OPCODE b (BIT #) f (FILE #) 0 b = 3-bit bit address f = 7-bit file register address Literal and control operations General 13 8 7 OPCODE The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into three basic categories: 0 k (literal) k = 8-bit immediate value • Byte-oriented operations • Bit-oriented operations • Literal and control operations CALL and GOTO instructions only 13 11 OPCODE 10 0 k (literal) k = 11-bit immediate value A description of each instruction is available in the PIC Mid-Range Reference Manual, (DS33023).  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 133 PIC16C781.book Page 134 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 15-2: PIC16CXXX INSTRUCTION SET Mnemonic, Operands 14-Bit Opcode Description Cycles MSb Status Notes Affected LSb BYTE-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER OPERATIONS ADDWF ANDWF CLRF CLRW COMF DECF DECFSZ INCF INCFSZ IORWF MOVF MOVWF NOP RLF RRF SUBWF SWAPF XORWF f, d f, d f f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d f f, d f, d f, d f, d f, d Add W and f AND W with f Clear f Clear W Complement f Decrement f Decrement f, Skip if 0 Increment f Increment f, Skip if 0 Inclusive OR W with f Move f Move W to f No Operation Rotate Left f through Carry Rotate Right f through Carry Subtract W from f Swap nibbles in f Exclusive OR W with f BCF BSF BTFSC BTFSS f, b f, b f, b f, b Bit Clear f Bit Set f Bit Test f, Skip if Clear Bit Test f, Skip if Set ADDLW ANDLW CALL CLRWDT GOTO IORLW MOVLW RETFIE RETLW RETURN SLEEP SUBLW XORLW k k k k k k k k k Add literal and W AND literal with W Call subroutine Clear Watchdog Timer Go to address Inclusive OR literal with W Move literal to W Return from interrupt Return with literal in W Return from Subroutine Go into standby mode Subtract W from literal Exclusive OR literal with W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1(2) 1 1(2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0111 0101 0001 0001 1001 0011 1011 1010 1111 0100 1000 0000 0000 1101 1100 0010 1110 0110 dfff dfff lfff 0000 dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff lfff 0xx0 dfff dfff dfff dfff dfff ffff ffff ffff 0011 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff 0000 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffff bfff bfff bfff bfff ffff ffff ffff ffff kkkk kkkk kkkk 0110 kkkk kkkk kkkk 0000 kkkk 0000 0110 kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk kkkk 0100 kkkk kkkk kkkk 1001 kkkk 1000 0011 kkkk kkkk C,DC,Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z C C C,DC,Z Z 1,2 1,2 2 1,2 1,2 1,2,3 1,2 1,2,3 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 1,2 BIT-ORIENTED FILE REGISTER OPERATIONS 1 1 1 (2) 1 (2) 01 01 01 01 00bb 01bb 10bb 11bb 1,2 1,2 3 3 LITERAL AND CONTROL OPERATIONS 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 11 11 10 00 10 11 11 00 11 00 00 11 11 111x 1001 0kkk 0000 1kkk 1000 00xx 0000 01xx 0000 0000 110x 1010 C,DC,Z Z TO,PD Z TO,PD C,DC,Z Z Note 1: When an I/O register is modified as a function of itself ( e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is '1' for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a '0'. 2: If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and, where applicable, d = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned to the Timer0 Module. 3: If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. DS41171B-page 134 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 135 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 15.1 Instruction Descriptions ADDLW Add Literal and W ANDWF AND W with f Syntax: [label] ADDLW Syntax: [label] ANDWF Operands: 0  k  255 Operands: 0  f  127 d  (W) .AND. (f)  (destination) k f,d Operation: (W) + k  (W) Status Affected: C, DC, Z Operation: The contents of the W register are added to the eight bit literal 'k' and the result is placed in the W register. Status Affected: Z Description: AND the W register with register 'f'. If 'd' is 0, the result is stored in the W register. If 'd' is 1, the result is stored back in register 'f'. ADDWF Add W and f BCF Bit Clear f Syntax: [label] ADDWF Syntax: [label] BCF Operands: 0  f  127 d  Operands: 0  f  127 0b7 Operation: (W) + (f)  (destination) Operation: 0  (f) Status Affected: C, DC, Z Status Affected: None Description: Add the contents of the W register with register 'f'. If 'd' is 0, the result is stored in the W register. If 'd' is 1, the result is stored back in register 'f'. Description: Bit 'b' in register 'f' is cleared. ANDLW AND Literal with W BSF Bit Set f Syntax: [label] ANDLW Syntax: [label] BSF Operands: 0  k  255 Operands: Operation: (W) .AND. (k)  (W) 0  f  127 0b7 Status Affected: Z Operation: 1  (f) The contents of W register are AND’ed with the eight bit literal 'k'. The result is placed in the W register. Status Affected: None Description: Bit 'b' in register 'f' is set. Description: Description:  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. f,d k f,b f,b BTFSS Bit Test f, Skip if Set Syntax: [label] BTFSS f,b Operands: 0  f  127 0b VDD .................................................................................................... ± 20 mA Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD ............................................................................................. ± 20 mA Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin.................................................................................................... 25 mA Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin .............................................................................................. 25 mA Maximum current sunk by PORTA and PORTB (combined)........................................................................... 200 mA Maximum current sourced by PORTA and PORTB (combined....................................................................... 200 mA Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows: PDIS = VDD x {IDD -  IOH} +  {(VDD - VOH) x IOH} + (VOL x IOL). † NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 147 PIC16C781.book Page 148 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 PIC16C781/782 VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40C  TA  +85C FIGURE 17-1: 6.0 5.5 5.0 VDD (Volts) 4.5 4.0 3.5 3.0 2.5 0 4 10 Frequency (MHz) 20 25 Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. PIC16LC781/782 VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH, -40C  TA  +85C FIGURE 17-2: 5.5 4.54.0 VDD (Volts) 2.7 0 4 10 Frequency (MHz) 20 25 Note 1: The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. DS41171B-page 148 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 149 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.1 DC Characteristics: Power Supply TABLE 17-1: DC CHARACTERISTICS: PIC16C781/782, DSTEMP (INDUSTRIAL) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature-40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions D001 VDD Supply Voltage 4.0 4.5 — — 5.5 5.5 V — XT, EC, RC, INTRC Oscillator HS Oscillator D001A VDD Supply Voltage (DSTEMP) 2.7 4.5 — — 5.5 5.5 V V XT, EC, RC, INTRC Oscillator HS Oscillator D002* VDR RAM Data Retention Voltage(1) — 1.5 — V D003 VPOR VDD Start Voltage to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal — TBD — V See section on Power-on Reset for details D004* SVDD VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal 0.05 — — V/ms See section on Power-on Reset for details. PWRT enabled D010 IDD Supply Current(2) — TBD TBD mA — TBD TBD mA — TBD TBD mA — TBD TBD mA D020 D020A FOSC = 20 MHz, VDD = 5.5V* HS Oscillator FOSC = 20 MHz, VDD = 4.5V HS Oscillator FOSC = 4 MHz, VDD = 4.0V* XT, RC w/CLKOUT FOSC = 32 kHz, VDD = 4.0V LP Oscillator IPD Power-down Current(3) — — TBD 1.5 TBD 19 A A VDD = 5.5V VDD = 4.0V IOPA Operational Amplifier — TBD TBD mA TBD TBD mA VDD = 5.0V, GBWP = 0 VDD = 5.0V, GBWP = 1 — TBD TBD mA — TBD TBD mA IVC* Voltage Comparators C1 and C2 VDD = 5.0V, VID>100 mV C1SP = 0 VDD = 5.0 , VID>100 mV C1SP = 1 IADC* Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) — TBD TBD mA D021 IWDT* Watchdog Timer — TBD TBD mA VDD = 4.0V D026 IAD* Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) — TBD TBD mA VDD = 5.5V, ADC not converting 1A IPLVD* Programmable Low Voltage Detect TBD TBD mA VDD = 4.0V IPBOR* Programmable Brown-out Reset TBD TBD mA VDD = 5.0V FOSC LP Oscillator, Operating Freq. INTRC Oscillator Operating Freq. — 4 37 — — 200 — — 4 20 kHz MHz kHz MHz MHz All temperatures All temperatures, OSCF = 1 All temperatures, OSCF = 0 All temperatures All temperatures XT Oscillator Operating Freq. HS Oscillator Operating Freq. * † Note 1: 2: 3: VDD = 5.0V 9 — — 0 0 These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered without losing RAM data. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern, and temperature also have an impact on the current consumption. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins configured as inputs, pulled to VDD MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified. The power-down current in SLEEP mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in SLEEP mode, with all I/O pins configured as iputs and tied to VDD or VSS.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 149 PIC16C781.book Page 150 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.2 DC Characteristics: Input/Output Pins TABLE 17-2: DC CHARACTERISTICS: PIC16C781/782, DSTEMP (INDUSTRIAL) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C TA  +85°C for industrial and Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC spec Section 17-1 DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Sym Min Typ† Max Units VSS VSS VSS VSS — — — — 0.15VDD 0.8V 0.2VDD 0.2VDD V V V V VSS — 0.3 VD V — — — VDD VDD V V 4.5V  VDD  5.5V For entire VDD range — — VDD VDD V V For entire VDD range 0.7VDD 50 — 250 VDD 400 V µA Input Leakage Current(1,2) I/O ports (with digital functions) — — ±1 µA D060A IIL I/O ports (with analog functions) — — ±100 nA D061 D063 RA5/MCLR/VPP OSC1 — — — — ±5 ±5 µA µA Output Low Voltage I/O ports (Includes CLKOUT) Output High Voltage — — 0.6 V VIL D030 D030A D031 D032 Characteristic Input Low Voltage I/O ports: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer D033 VIH D040 D040A D041 D042 MCLR OSC1 (in XT, HS, LP and EC) Input High Voltage I/O ports: with TTL buffer with Schmitt Trigger buffer D042A D070 IPURB D060 IIL D080 VOL MCLR OSC1 (XT, HS, LP and EC) PORTB Weak Pull-up Current Per Pin 2.0 (0.25VDD + 0.8V) 0.8VDD 0.8VDD Conditions For entire VDD range 4.5V  VDD  5.5V For entire VDD range VDD = 5V, VPIN = VSS Vss VPIN  VDD, Pin at hi-impedance Vss  VPIN  VDD, Pin at hi-impedance Vss  VPIN  VDD Vss  VPIN  VDD, XT, HS, LP and EC osc configuration IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 4.5V D090 VOH VDD - 0.7 — — V IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD = 4.5V D150* VOD — — 10.5 V RA4 pin — — 15 pF In XT, HS and LP modes when external clock is used to drive OSC1. D100 I/O ports(2) (Includes CLKOUT) Open Drain High Voltage Capacitive Loading Specs on Output Pins* Cosc2 OSC2 pin D101 CIO * † Note 1: 2: All I/O pins and OSC2 (in RC — — 50 pF mode) These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. DS41171B-page 150 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 151 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.3 17.3.1 AC Characteristics: PIC16C781/782 (Industrial) TIMING PARAMETER SYMBOLOGY The timing parameter symbols have been created following one of the following formats: 1. TppS2ppS 2. TppS T F Frequency Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings: pp T Time osc ck CLKOUT dt Data in io I/O port mc MCLR Uppercase letters and their meanings: OSC1 t0 t1 T0CKI T1CKI P R V Z High Low Period Rise Valid Hi-impedance High Low S F H I L Fall High Invalid (Hi-impedance) Low FIGURE 17-3: LOAD CONDITIONS Load condition 2 Load condition 1 VDD/2 RL CL Pin CL Pin VSS VSS RL = 464 CL = 50 pF 15 pF for all pins except OSC2 for OSC2 output  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 151 PIC16C781.book Page 152 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.3.2 TIMING DIAGRAMS AND SPECIFICATIONS FIGURE 17-4: CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING Q1 Q4 Q2 Q3 OSC1 11 10 CLKOUT 13 19 14 12 18 16 I/O Pin (input) 15 17 I/O Pin (output) new value old value 20, 21 Note 1: Refer to Figure 17-3 for load conditions. TABLE 17-3: Parameter No. CLKOUT AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions 10* TOSH2CKL OSC1 to CLKOUT — 75 200 ns 11* TOSH2CKH OSC1 to CLKOUT — 75 200 ns (Note 1) (Note 1) 12* TCKR CLKOUT rise time — 35 100 ns (Note 1) 13* TCkF CLKOUT fall time — 35 100 ns (Note 1) 14* TCKL2IOV CLKOUT  to Port out valid — — 0.5TCY + 20 ns (Note 1) 15* TIOV2CKH Port in valid before CLKOUT  0.25TCY + 25 — — ns (Note 1) 16* TCKH2IOl Port in hold after CLKOUT  0 — — ns (Note 1) 17* TOSH2IOV OSC1 (Q1 cycle) to Port out valid — 50 150 ns 18* TOSH2IOl OSC1 (Q2 cycle) to Port input invalid (I/O in hold time) PIC16C781/782 100 — — ns PIC16LC781/782 200 — — ns 19* TIOV2OSH Port input valid to OSC1 (I/O in setup time) 0 — — ns 20* TIOR Port output rise time PIC16C781/782 — 10 25 ns PIC16LC781/782 — — 60 ns 21* TIOF Port output fall time PIC16C781/782 — 10 25 ns — — 60 ns 22††* TINP INT pin high or low time TCY — — ns 23††* TRBP RB7:RB0 change INT high or low time TCY — — ns PIC16LC781/782 * † These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. †† These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges. Note 1: Measurements are taken in RC mode where CLKOUT output is 4 x TOSC. DS41171B-page 152 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 153 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 17-5: EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 OSC1 1 3 3 4 4 2 CLKOUT TABLE 17-4: Parameter No. 1A EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS Sym FOSC 1 TOSC Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units External CLKIN Frequency(1) DC DC DC DC — — — — 4 20 20 200 MHz MHz MHz kHz Oscillator Frequency(1) 0.1 4 5 — — — 4 20 200 MHz XT osc mode MHz HS osc mode kHz LP osc mode External CLKIN Period(1) 250 50 50 5 — — — — — — — — ns ns ns s XT and RC osc mode EC osc mode HS osc mode LP osc mode Oscillator Period(1) 250 50 5 — — — 10,000 250 — ns ns s XT osc mode HS osc mode LP osc mode 200 100 2.5 15 TCY — — — DC — — — ns ns s ns — — — — — — 25 50 15 ns ns ns TCY = 4/FOSC XT oscillator LP oscillator HS oscillator EC oscillator XT oscillator LP oscillator HS oscillator EC oscillator 2 TCY 3* TOSL, TOSH Instruction Cycle Time(1) External Clock in (OSC1) High or Low Time 4* TOSR, TOSF External Clock in (OSC1) Rise or Fall Time Conditions XT osc mode EC osc mode HS osc mode LP osc mode * † These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time-base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at "min." values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKIN pin. When an external clock input is used, the "Max." cycle time limit is "DC" (no clock) for all devices.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 153 PIC16C781.book Page 154 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 17-5: INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR CALIBRATED FREQUENCIES PIC16C781/782, DSTEMP Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise specified) Operating Temperature –40×C  TA  +85C (industrial) Operating Voltage VDD range is described in Section 17-1. AC Characteristics Parameter No. Min Typ(1) Internal Calibrated RC Frequency 3.65 Internal Calibrated RC Frequency 3.55* Sym Characteristic Max Units Conditions 4.00 4.28 MHz VDD = 5.0V 4.00 4.31* MHz VDD = 2.5V * These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note 1: Data in the Typical (“Typ”) column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. FIGURE 17-6: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND POWER-UP TIMER TIMING VDD MCLR 30 Internal POR 33 PWRT Time-out 32 OSC Time-out Internal RESET Watchdog Timer Reset 31 34 34 I/O Pins Note 1: Refer to Figure 17-3 for load conditions. FIGURE 17-7: VDD BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING BVDD 35 DS41171B-page 154 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 155 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 17-6: Parameter No. RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER, AND BROWN-OUT RESET REQUIREMENTS Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions 30* TMCL MCLR Pulse Width (low) 2 — — s VDD = 5V, -40°C to +85°C 31* TWDT Watchdog Timer Time-out Period (No Prescaler) 7 18 33 ms VDD = 5V, -40°C to +85°C 32* TOST Oscillation Start-up Timer Period — 1024 TOSC — — TOSC = OSC1 period 33* TPWRT Power-up Timer Period 28 72 132 ms VDD = 5V, -40°C to +85°C 34* TIOZ I/O Hi-impedance from MCLR Low or Watchdog Timer Reset — — 2.1 s TBOR Brown-out Reset pulse width 100 — — s 35* VDD  VBOR (D005) * These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. FIGURE 17-8: BROWN-OUT RESET CHARACTERISTICS VDD VBOR (device not in Brown-out Reset) (device in Brown-out Reset) RESET (due to BOR) 72 ms time out (1) Note 1: Only if Power-up Timer is enabled. If Timer is disabled, time-out is 0 ms  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 155 PIC16C781.book Page 156 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 17-9: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS RA4/T0CKI 41 40 42 RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI 46 45 47 48 TMR0 or TMR1 Note: Refer to Figure 17-3 for load conditions. DS41171B-page 156 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 157 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 17-7: Param No. TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions — — — — ns ns Must also meet parameter 42 Must also meet parameter 42 40* TTOH T0CKI High Pulse Width No Prescaler With Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 10 41* TTOL T0CKI Low Pulse Width No Prescaler 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns 10 — — ns TCY + 40 — — ns Greater of: 20 or TCY + 40 N — — ns N = prescale value (2, 4, ..., 256) Must also meet parameter 47 With Prescaler 42* TTOP T0CKI Period No Prescaler With Prescaler 45* TT1H T1CKI High Time Synchronous, Prescaler = 1 Synchronous, PIC16C781/782 Prescaler = 2,4,8 Asynchronous 45* TT1H PIC16C781/782 T1CKI High Time Synchronous, Prescaler = 1 PIC16LC781/782 Synchronous, Prescaler = 2,4,8 Asynchronous 46* TT1L T1CKI Low Time PIC16LC781/782 Synchronous, Prescaler = 1 Synchronous, PIC16C781/782 Prescaler = 2,4,8 Asynchronous 46* TT1L T1CKI Low Time PIC16C781/782 Synchronous, Prescaler = 1 PIC16LC781/782 Synchronous, Prescaler = 2,4,8 — — ns 15 — — ns 30 — — ns 0.5Tcy + 20 — — ns 15 — — ns 30 — — ns 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns 15 — — ns ns 30 — — 0.5TCY + 20 — — ns 15 — — ns Asynchronous PIC16LC781/782 30 — — ns Synchronous PIC16C781/782 Greater of: 30 OR TCY + 40 N — — ns Asynchronous PIC16C781/782 60 — — ns Synchronous PIC16LC781/782 Greater of: 30 OR TCY + 40 N — — ns Asynchronous PIC16C781/782 47* TT1P T1CKI input period 47* TT1P T1CKI input period FT 1 Timer1 oscillator input frequency range (oscillator enabled by setting bit T1OSCEN) 48* * † 0.5TCY + 20 60 — — ns DC — 50 kHz Must also meet parameter 47 Must also meet parameter 47 Must also meet parameter 47 N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) N = prescale value (1, 2, 4, 8) — 7TOSC — Tcke2tmrl Delay from external clock edge to timer increment 2TOSC These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 157 PIC16C781.book Page 158 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.4 Operational Amplifier TABLE 17-8: DC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (OPA) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, TA = 25°C, VCM = VDD/2, RL = 100 k to VDD/2, and VOUT ~ VDD/2 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C for Industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Symbol Min Typ Max Units Input Offset Voltage Input Offset Voltage VOS TBD ±2 TBD mV Prior to Auto Calibration Input Offset Voltage Input Offset Voltage VOS TBD ±100 TBD V Following Auto Calibration Input Current and Impedance Input Bias Current Input Offset Bias Current IB IOS -50 — — ±1 +50 — nA pA Following Auto Calibration Common Mode Common Mode Input Range Common Mode Rejection VCM CMR VSS TBD — 80 VDD-1.4 — V dB Open Loop Gain DC Open Loop Gain AOL — 90 — dB DC Open Loop Gain AOL — 80 — dB DC Open Loop Gain AOL — TBD — dB AOL — TBD — dB VOUT VSS+0.1 — VDD-0.1 V ISC — 25 TBD mA DC Open Loop Gain Output Output Voltage Swing Output Short Circuit Current Conditions Following Auto Calibration VDD = 5 V VCM = VDD/2, Frequency = DC GBWP = 1 following Auto Calibration RL = 25 k connected to VDD/2, 50 mV < VOUT < VDD - 50 mV RL = 5 k connected to VDD/2, 100 mV < VOUT < VDD - 100 mV GBWP = 0 following Auto Calibration RL = 50 k connected to VDD/2, 50 mV < VOUT < VDD - 50 mV RL = 100 k connected to VDD/2, 50 mV < VOUT < VDD - 50 mV GBWP = 1 Following Auto Calibration RL = 5 k connected to VDD/2 VDD = 5 V Power Supply Power Supply Rejection PSR — 80 — dB Following Auto Calibration Auto Calibration Reference ACR TBD 1.2 TBD V CALREF = 0 DS41171B-page 158 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 159 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 TABLE 17-9: AC CHARACTERISTICS: OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER (OPA) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, VSS = GND, TA = 25°C, VCM = VDD/2, RL = 100k to VDD/2, and VOUT = VDD/2 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C for Industrial AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Symbol Min Typ Max Units Conditions GBWP — 75 — kHz VDD = 5V, GBWP = 0 GBWP — 2 — MHz VDD = 5V, GBWP = 1 TZ TZ TON TON — — — — 300 TBD 10 TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD s s s s VDD = 5V, GBWP = 1 VDD = 5V GBWP = 0 VDD = 5V, GWBP = 1 VDD = 5V, GBWP = 0 Phase Margin M M — — TBD TBD — — Slew Rate SR SR — — TBD TBD — — Gain Bandwidth Product Input Offset Auto Calibration Time Turn On Time Note: degrees VDD = 5V, GBWP = 0 degrees VDD = 5V, GBWP = 1 V/s V/s VDD = 5V, GBWP = 0 VDD = 5V, GBWP = 1 Data in ‘Typ’ column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 159 PIC16C781.book Page 160 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.5 Comparators TABLE 17-10: DC CHARACTERISTICS: VOLTAGE COMPARATORS C1 AND C2 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, TA = 25°C, VCM = VDD/2 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C for Industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Symbol Min Typ Max Units Input Offset Voltage VOS TBD TBD ±1 ± 2.5 TBD TBD mV mV Input Current and Impedance Input Bias Current Input Offset Bias Current IB IOS TBD — — TBD — TBD nA nA VCM CMR VSS — — 70 VDD1.4V V dB Open Loop Gain DC Open Loop Gain AOL — 90 — dB Power Supply Rejection PSR — TBD — dB Common Mode Common Mode Input Range Common Mode Rejection Conditions C1SP = 1, C2SP = 1 C1SP = 0, C2SP = 0 VDD = 5V VCM = VDD/2, Frequency = DC VDD = 5V TABLE 17-11: AC CHARACTERISTICS: COMPARATORS C1 AND C2 Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, TA = 25°C, VCM = VDD/2 Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C for Industrial AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Response Time Response Time Symbol Min Typ Max Units Conditions tr — 75 — ns tr — 0.5 — s tr — 100 TBD ns — 0.5 TBD s VDD = 5V, C1SP = 1, C2SP = 1, Comparator output signal is for internal use only, Input overdrive = 10 mV, step = 110 mV, VCM = VDD/2. VDD = 5V, C1SP = 0, C2SP = 0, Comparator output signal is for internal use only, Input overdrive = 10 mV, step = 110 mV, VCM = VDD/2. VDD = 5 , CL = 100 pF, C1SP = 1, C2SP = 1, Comparator output is available on I/O pin, Input overdrive = 10 mV, step = 110 mV, VCM = VDD/2. VDD = 5 , CL = 100 pF, C1SP = 0, C2SP = 0, Comparator output is available on I/O pin, Input overdrive = 10 mV, step = 110 mV, VCM = VDD/2. — — 10 TBD TBD TBD s s tr Turn On Time DS41171B-page 160 TON Preliminary C1SP = 0, C2SP = 0, VDD = 5V C1SP = 1, C2SP = 1, VDD = 5V  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 161 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.6 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) TABLE 17-12: DC CHARACTERISTICS: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7V to 5.5V, TA = 25°C VDD = 5V, DACREF = 5V Operating Temperature -40°C to +85°C for Industrial DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Symbol Resolution Min Typ RES Max Units 8 Conditions bits Transfer Function Accuracy Integral Non-Linearity Error Differential Non-Linearity Error Offset Error Gain Error INL(1) DNL(1) TBD TBD TBD TBD .25 .10 ±2.5 .25 TBD TBD TBD TBD LSb LSb mV LSb DACREF Input Characteristics DACREF Input Impedance DACREF Input Max Voltage RREF VMAX TBD TBD 100 — — VDD k V Output Characteristics Output Voltage Range VOUT VSS+.05 — VDD0.05 V VSS+0.1 — VDD = 5V, DACREF = 5V V VDD-0.1 VDD = 5V RL = 100 k to VDD/2 VDD = 5V RL = 25 k to VDD/2 Output Short Circuit Current ISC* — 2 TBD mA Output Series Resistance RO* — — TBD TBD  VDD  3V VDAC = VDD/2 Power Supply Power Supply Current IDAC — 250 TBD A VDD = 5V VDD = 5V * Characterized, but not tested. Note 1: Calculated using end point method. TABLE 17-13: AC CHARACTERISTICS: DIGITAL-TO-ANALOG CONVERTER (DAC) Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): VDD = 2.7 V to 5.5 V, TA = 25°C Operating Temperature-40°C to +85°C for Industrial AC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Parameters Symbol Min Typ Max Units Output Characteristics Slew Rate SR — 1 — Settling Time TS — 5 10 s Turn On Time TON — 10 TBD s Conditions V/s VDD = 5 V, CL = 50 pF VDD = 5 V, CL = 50 pF Settling time to 1/2 LSb for 10%FS to 90%FS step VDD = 5 V Note 1: Data in ‘Typ’ column is at 5V, 25° C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 161 PIC16C781.book Page 162 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.7 Analog Peripherals Characteristics 17.7.1 BANDGAP VOLTAGE Bandgap voltage is used as the reference voltage in the PBOR, PLVD, Auto Calibration, and VR modules FIGURE 17-10: BANDGAP START-UP TIME VBGAP = 1.32V (internal use only) VBGAP Enable Bandgap TBGAP Bandgap Stable TABLE 17-14: BANDGAP START-UP TIME Parameter No. 36* * † Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions — 30 — s Defined as the time between the instant that the bandgap is enabled and the moment that the bandgap reference voltage is stable. TBGAP Bandgap start-up time These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in "Typ" column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. 17.7.2 VR MODULE TABLE 17-15: DC CHARACTERISTICS: VR Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for industrial Operating voltage VDD as described in Section 17.1 DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. D400 D402* Symbol Typ† Max Units VR Output Voltage — 3.072 — V Output Voltage Temperature Coefficient External Load Source External Load Sink External Capacitor Load Load Regulation — TBD TBD ppm/°C — — — — — — mA mA pF — — 1 1 5 -5 200 TBD TBD mV/mA — — 1 mV/V IVREFSO IVREFSI CL* D406* DVOUT/ DIOUT DVOUT/ DVDD * † Min TCVOUT D404* D405* D407* Characteristic Supply Regulation Conditions VDD  3.5V ISOURCE = 0 mA to 5 mA ISINK = 0 mA to 5 mA These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. DS41171B-page 162 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 163 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.7.3 PROGRAMMABLE LOW VOLTAGE DETECT MODULE (PLVD) TABLE 17-16: LOW VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS VDD VLVD (LVDIF set by hardware) LVDIF (LVDIF can be cleared in software anytime during the gray area) TABLE 17-17: ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS: PLVD DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. D420* Characteristic Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating temperature -40°C  TA  +85°C for Industrial Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC spec Section 17-1. Symbol Min Typ† Max Units Conditions PLVD Voltage LV = 0100 VPLVD 2.35 — 2.80 V — LV = 0101 2.55 — 3.02 V — LV = 0110 2.64 — 3.14 V — LV = 0111 2.83 — 3.37 V — LV = 1000 3.11 — 3.71 V — LV = 1001 3.29 — 3.93 V — LV = 1010 3.39 — 4.04 V — LV = 1011 3.58 — 4.26 V — LV = 1100 3.77 — 4.49 V — LV = 1101 3.95 — 4.71 V — LV = 1110 4.23 — 5.05 V — † Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note 1: Production tested at TAMB = 25°C. Specifications over temperature limits ensured by characterization.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 163 PIC16C781.book Page 164 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 17.7.4 PROGRAMMABLE BROWN-OUT RESET MODULE DC CHARACTERISTICS: PBOR DC CHARACTERISTICS Param No. Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated): Operating temperature-40°C  TA  +85°C for Industrial Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC spec Section 17-1. Characteristic D005* BOR Voltage BORV = 11 BORV = 10 BORV = 01 BORV = 00 Symbol Min Typ Max Units Conditions VBOR 2.35 2.55 3.95 4.23 — — — — 2.80 3.02 4.71 5.05 V — — — — TABLE 17-18: ADC CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS PIC16C781/782 Param No. Sym Characteristic Min Typ† Max Units Conditions A01 NR Resolution — — 8 bits ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS  VAIN  ADCREF A02 EABS Absolute Error — — < 1 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS  VAIN  ADCREF — — < 2 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 3.0V(3) A03 INL Integral Now Linearity Error — — < 1 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS  VAIN  ADCREF — — < 2 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 3.0V(3) A04 DNL Differential Now Linearity Error — — < 1 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS  VAIN  ADCREF — — < 2 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 3.0V(3) — — < 1 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS VAIN  ADCREF — — < 2 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 3.0V(3) — — < 1 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 5.12V, VSS  VAIN  ADCREF — — < 2 LSb ADCREF = AVDD = 3.0V(3) A05 GN Gain Error A06 EOFF Offset Error — — VSS  VAIN  ADCREF 3.0V — VDD + 0.3 V — VSS - 0.3 — ADCREF V — — — 10.0 k — ADC Conversion Current (VDD) — 180 — A Average current consumption when ADC is on.(1) ADCREF Input Current(2) 10 — 1000 A — — 40 A During VAIN acquisition. Based on differential of VHOLD to VAIN. To charge CHOLD, see Section 9.3. During ADC Conversion cycle. A10 — Monotonicity A20 ADCREF Reference Voltage A25 VAIN Analog Input Voltage A30 ZAIN Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source A40 IADC A50 IREF * † Note 1: 2: 3: 4: — guaranteed (4) These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. When ADC is off, it will not consume any current other than minor leakage current. The power-down current specification (D020A) includes any such leakage from the ADC module. ADCREF current is from RA3/AN3/VREF1 pin or AVDD pin, whichever is selected as reference input. These specifications apply if ADCREF = 3.0 V and if AVDD  3.0 V. VAIN must be between VSS and ADCREF. The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the Input Voltage and has no missing codes. DS41171B-page 164 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 165 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 FIGURE 17-11: ADC CONVERSION TIMING BSF ADCON0, GO 1 TCY (TOSC/2)(1) 131 Q4 130 ADC CLK 132 7 ADC DATA 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NEW_DATA OLD_DATA ADRES ADIF CONVERSION COMPLETE GO/DONE SAMPLING STOPPED SAMPLE Note 1: If the ADC clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the ADC clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. TABLE 17-19: ADC CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Param No. Sym Characteristic 130 TAD ADC clock period ADC Internal RC Oscillator Period 131 TCNV Conversion time (not including S/H time)(1) 132 TACQ Acquisition time(2) 134 135 PIC16C781/782 PIC16LC781/782 TGO Q4 to ADC clock start TSWC Switching from convert  sample time Min Typ† Max Units Conditions 2.0 TBD 4.0 TBD 6.0 TBD µs µs — 9.5 — TAD 20 — s 5* — — s The minimum time is the amplifier settling time. This may be used if the "new" input voltage has not changed by more than 1 LSb (i.e., 19.5 mV @ 5.12V) from the last sampled voltage (as stated on CHOLD). — TOSC/2§ — — If the ADC clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the ADC clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. 1.5§ — — TAD ADC RC mode * † These parameters are characterized but not tested. Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. § These specifications ensured by design. Note 1: ADRES register may be read on the following TCY cycle. 2: See Section 13.1 for min. conditions.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 165 PIC16C781.book Page 166 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 166 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 167 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 18.0 DC AND AC CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS AND TABLES The graphs and tables provided in this section are for design guidance and are not tested nor guaranteed. In some graphs or tables the data presented is outside specified operating range (e.g., outside specified VDD range.). This is for information only and devices are ensured to operate properly only within the specified range. The data presented in this section is a statistical summary of data collected on units from different lots over a period of time. Standard deviation is denoted by sigma ( ). Typ or Typical represents the mean of the distribution at 25°C. Max or Maximum represents the mean +3 over the temperature range of -40°C to 85°C. Min or Minimum represents the mean -3 over the temperature range of -40°C to 85°C. Graphs and Tables are not available at this time.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 167 PIC16C781.book Page 168 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 168 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 169 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 19.0 PACKAGING INFORMATION 19.1 Package Marking Information 20-Lead SSOP Example XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN PIC16C781 -I/SS 0107017 20-Lead CERDIP Windowed Example PIC16C781 /JW XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX YYWWNNN 20-Lead SOIC Example XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN PIC16C781/SO 0110017 Example 20-Lead PDIP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN e3 * Note: 0105017 PIC16C781-I/P 0110017 Customer-specific information Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 169 PIC16C781.book Page 170 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 20-Lead Plastic Shrink Small Outline (SS) – 209 mil, 5.30 mm (SSOP) Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging E E1 p D B 2 1 n  c A2 A  L A1  Units Dimension Limits n p Number of Pins Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff § Overall Width Molded Package Width Overall Length Foot Length Lead Thickness Foot Angle Lead Width Mold Draft Angle Top Mold Draft Angle Bottom A A2 A1 E E1 D L c  B   MIN .068 .064 .002 .299 .201 .278 .022 .004 0 .010 0 0 INCHES* NOM 20 .026 .073 .068 .006 .309 .207 .284 .030 .007 4 .013 5 5 MAX .078 .072 .010 .322 .212 .289 .037 .010 8 .015 10 10 MILLIMETERS NOM 20 0.65 1.73 1.85 1.63 1.73 0.05 0.15 7.59 7.85 5.11 5.25 7.06 7.20 0.56 0.75 0.10 0.18 0.00 101.60 0.25 0.32 0 5 0 5 MIN MAX 1.98 1.83 0.25 8.18 5.38 7.34 0.94 0.25 203.20 0.38 10 10 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MO-150 Drawing No. C04-072 DS41171B-page 170 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 171 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 20-Lead CERDIP Windowed Diagram not available at this time.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 171 PIC16C781.book Page 172 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 20-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil (SOIC) Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging E E1 p D 2 B n 1 h  45 c A2 A   A1 L Units Dimension Limits n p Number of Pins Pitch Overall Height Molded Package Thickness Standoff § Overall Width Molded Package Width Overall Length Chamfer Distance Foot Length Foot Angle Lead Thickness Lead Width Mold Draft Angle Top Mold Draft Angle Bottom * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic A A2 A1 E E1 D h L  c B   MIN .093 .088 .004 .394 .291 .496 .010 .016 0 .009 .014 0 0 INCHES* NOM 20 .050 .099 .091 .008 .407 .295 .504 .020 .033 4 .011 .017 12 12 MAX .104 .094 .012 .420 .299 .512 .029 .050 8 .013 .020 15 15 MILLIMETERS NOM 20 1.27 2.36 2.50 2.24 2.31 0.10 0.20 10.01 10.34 7.39 7.49 12.60 12.80 0.25 0.50 0.41 0.84 0 4 0.23 0.28 0.36 0.42 0 12 0 12 MIN MAX 2.64 2.39 0.30 10.67 7.59 13.00 0.74 1.27 8 0.33 0.51 15 15 Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013 Drawing No. C04-094 DS41171B-page 172 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 173 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 20-Lead Plastic Dual In-line (P) – 300 mil (PDIP) Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging E1 D 2 n  1 E A2 A L c A1  B1 eB p B Units Dimension Limits n p MIN INCHES* NOM 20 .100 .155 .130 MAX MILLIMETERS NOM 20 2.54 3.56 3.94 2.92 3.30 0.38 7.49 7.87 6.10 6.35 26.04 26.24 3.05 3.30 0.20 0.29 1.40 1.52 0.36 0.46 7.87 9.40 5 10 5 10 MIN Number of Pins Pitch Top to Seating Plane A .140 .170 Molded Package Thickness A2 .115 .145 Base to Seating Plane A1 .015 Shoulder to Shoulder Width E .295 .310 .325 Molded Package Width E1 .240 .250 .260 Overall Length D 1.025 1.033 1.040 Tip to Seating Plane L .120 .130 .140 c Lead Thickness .008 .012 .015 Upper Lead Width B1 .055 .060 .065 Lower Lead Width B .014 .018 .022 Overall Row Spacing § eB .310 .370 .430  Mold Draft Angle Top 5 10 15  Mold Draft Angle Bottom 5 10 15 * Controlling Parameter § Significant Characteristic Notes: Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side. JEDEC Equivalent: MS-001 Drawing No. C04-019  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary MAX 4.32 3.68 8.26 6.60 26.42 3.56 0.38 1.65 0.56 10.92 15 15 DS41171B-page 173 PIC16C781.book Page 174 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 174 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 175 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 INDEX A BOR ADC DC Characteristics.................................................... 164 BOR. See Brown-out Reset Brown-out Reset (BOR).................................... 117, 125, 126 Buck Configuration LC Power Supply............................... 112 Buck LC Switching Power Supply..................................... 110 Accuracy/Error ............................................................ 75 Connection Considerations......................................... 76 Conversion Time ......................................................... 75 Converter Characteristics ......................................... 164 Effects of a RESET ..................................................... 76 Faster Conversion - Lower Resolution Trade-off ........ 75 Flow Chart of ADC Operation ..................................... 77 References.................................................................. 76 Transfer Function ........................................................ 76 ADC Acquisition Requirements........................................... 73 ADC Conversion Clock ....................................................... 72 ADC Minimum Charging Time ............................................ 73 ADC Operation During SLEEP ........................................... 75 Analog Signal Multiplexing Diagram ..................................... 7 Analog-to-digital Converter (ADC) Module ......................... 69 Analog-to-Digital Converter Module Control Registers ........................................................ 70 Assembler MPASM Assembler ................................................... 141 B Banking, Data Memory ....................................................... 17 Block Diagrams ADC Module................................................................ 69 Auto Calibration Module.............................................. 85 Comparator C1 Simplified........................................... 90 Comparator C2 Simplified........................................... 90 DAC Converter............................................................ 80 Low Voltage Detect ..................................................... 64 On-Chip Reset Circuit ............................................... 121 OPA Module................................................................ 83 PIC16C781 ................................................................... 5 PIC16C782 ................................................................... 6 PSMC Module in Dual Alternating Output PWM Mode ............................................................... 100 PSMC Module in Single Output PSM Mode ............. 102 PSMC Module in Single Output PWM Mode .............. 99 RA0/AN0/OPA+ Pin .................................................... 27 RA1/AN1/OPA- Pin ..................................................... 28 RA2/AN2/VREF2 Pin .................................................. 29 RA3/AN3/VREF1 Pin .................................................. 30 RA4/T0CKI Pin............................................................ 31 RA5/MCLR/VPP.......................................................... 32 RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI Pin ................................. 33 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN Pin ................................................ 34 RB0/INT/AN4/VR Pin .................................................. 37 RB1/AN5/VDAC Pin.................................................... 38 RB2/AN6 Pin............................................................... 39 RB3/AN7/OPA Pin ...................................................... 40 RB4 Pin....................................................................... 41 RB5 Pin....................................................................... 42 RB6/C1/PSMC1A Pin ................................................. 43 RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G Pin ......................................... 44 RC Oscillator Mode................................................... 120 Timer0 ......................................................................... 51 Timer0/WDT Prescaler................................................ 53 TIMER1....................................................................... 58 Watchdog Timer (WDT) ............................................ 130 Boost LC Switching Power Supply.................................... 107  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. C C1 Input to PSMC w/DAC as Reference ............................ 95 C2 Configuration Program.................................................. 95 CALCON Register .............................................................. 84 Calculating the Minimum Required Acquisition Time ................................................................. 73 Clock Noise......................................................................... 76 Code Examples Doing an ADC Conversion ......................................... 74 Code Protection................................................................ 117 Comparator C1 Control Register ........................................ 89 Comparator C2 Configuration With Output Synchronized to T1CKI....................................................... 95 Comparator C2 Control Registers ...................................... 92 Comparator C2 Synchronized to T1CKI ............................. 95 Comparator Configuration .................................................. 95 Comparator Module............................................................ 89 Associated Registers.................................................. 98 Control Registers........................................................ 89 Effects of a RESET..................................................... 98 Output State Versus Input Conditions......................... 89 Configuration as OPAMP or Comparator ........................... 86 Configuration Bits ............................................................. 117 Configuration of Comparator C1 with DAC......................... 96 Configuring the ADC Module .............................................. 72 Configuring the Reference Voltages................................... 72 Control Register CM2CON0 ............................................... 92 Control Register T1CON..................................................... 56 D DAC Configuration.............................................................. 81 DAC Module Accuracy/Error............................................................ 81 Associated Registers/Bits........................................... 81 DAC Transfer Function ............................................... 81 Differential Non-Linearity Error ................................... 81 Effects of a RESET..................................................... 81 Gain Error ................................................................... 81 Integral Non-Linearity Error ........................................ 81 Monotonicity ............................................................... 81 Offset Error ................................................................. 81 Data Memory Bank Select (RP Bits) ................................................. 17 Data Memory Organization................................................. 11 Register File Map ....................................................... 12 DC Characteristics PIC16C781/782, PIC16LC781/782 (Industrial)......................................................... 149 Development Support....................................................... 141 Device Overview................................................................... 5 Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) Module......................... 79 Control Registers........................................................ 79 Direct Addressing ............................................................... 24 Preliminary DS41171B-page 175 PIC16C781.book Page 176 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 E EC Mode ........................................................................... 119 Effect of RESET on Core Registers .................................... 24 Summary..................................................................... 24 Effects of RESET ................................................................ 52 Electrical Characteristics................................................... 147 Errata .................................................................................... 3 Examples DAC Configuration ...................................................... 81 OPAMP Calibration Mode Configuration..................... 86 Peripheral Configuration ........................................... 113 PSMC Configuration ................................................. 109 PSMC Configuration Example for a Buck Mode Switching Power Supply ................................. 111 Window Comparator ................................................... 97 External Power-on Reset Circuit ....................................... 122 F Firmware Instructions........................................................ 133 FSR Register....................................................................... 15 G General Purpose Register File............................................ 13 I I/O Port Analog/Digital Mode............................................... 25 I/O Ports .............................................................................. 25 ICEPIC In-Circuit Emulator ............................................... 142 ID Locations ...................................................................... 117 In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ............................... 117 Indirect Addressing ............................................................. 24 Initialization Condition for All Registers............................. 126 Initializing Timer0 ................................................................ 51 Instruction Format ............................................................. 133 Instruction Set ................................................................... 133 ADDLW ..................................................................... 135 ADDWF ..................................................................... 135 ANDLW ..................................................................... 135 ANDWF ..................................................................... 135 BCF ........................................................................... 135 BSF ........................................................................... 135 BTFSC ...................................................................... 136 BTFSS ...................................................................... 135 CALL ......................................................................... 136 CLRF......................................................................... 136 CLRW........................................................................ 136 CLRWDT................................................................... 136 COMF ....................................................................... 136 DECF ........................................................................ 136 DECFSZ.................................................................... 137 GOTO........................................................................ 137 INCF.......................................................................... 137 INCFSZ ..................................................................... 137 IORLW....................................................................... 137 IORWF ...................................................................... 137 MOVF........................................................................ 138 MOVLW..................................................................... 138 MOVWF .................................................................... 138 NOP .......................................................................... 138 RETFIE ..................................................................... 138 RETLW...................................................................... 138 RETURN ................................................................... 138 RLF ........................................................................... 138 RRF........................................................................... 139 SLEEP ...................................................................... 139 DS41171B-page 176 SUBLW ..................................................................... 139 SUBWF..................................................................... 139 SWAPF ..................................................................... 139 XORLW..................................................................... 139 XORWF .................................................................... 140 INT Interrupt (RB0/INT/AN4/VR). See Interrupt Sources INTCON Register GIE Bit ........................................................................ 19 INTE Bit ...................................................................... 19 INTF Bit ...................................................................... 19 PEIE Bit ...................................................................... 19 RBIE Bit ...................................................................... 19 RBIF Bit ...................................................................... 19 T0IE Bit....................................................................... 19 T0IF Bit ....................................................................... 19 Interrupt Sources ...................................................... 117, 128 RB0/INT Pin, External............................................... 128 TMR0 Overflow................................................... 52, 129 Interrupts, Context Saving During..................................... 129 Interrupts, Enable Bits Global Interrupt Enable (GIE Bit).............................. 128 Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB0) Enable (RBIE Bit).................................................................. 129 Interrupts, Flag Bits Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) Flag (RBIF Bit).................................................................. 129 TMR0 Overflow Flag (T0IF Bit)................................. 129 K KEELOQ Evaluation and Programming Tools .................... 144 L Low Power Window Comparator with Interrupt .................. 96 Low Voltage Detect Associated Register Summary ................................... 67 Low Voltage Detect Registers ............................................ 67 Low Voltage Detect Waveforms ......................................... 65 LP, XT and HS Modes ...................................................... 119 M Master Clear (MCLR) MCLR Reset, Normal Operation....................... 125, 126 MCLR Reset, SLEEP................................ 121, 125, 126 Memory Organization ......................................................... 11 MPLAB C17 and MPLAB C18 C Compilers ..................... 141 MPLAB ICD In-Circuit Debugger ...................................... 143 MPLAB ICE High Performance Universal In-Circuit Emulator with MPLAB IDE ................................ 142 MPLAB Integrated Development Environment Software ...................................................... 141 MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ................ 142 O OPA Auto Calibration.......................................................... 83 OPA Module Associated Registers .................................................. 87 Common Mode Voltage Range................................... 86 Effects of a RESET..................................................... 86 Gain Bandwidth Product ............................................. 86 Input Offset Voltage .................................................... 86 Leakage Current......................................................... 86 Open Loop Gain ......................................................... 86 OPA Offset Voltage ............................................................ 84 OPCODE Field Descriptions............................................. 133 Operational Amplifier (OPA) Module .................................. 83 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 177 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 OPTION_REG Register INTEDG Bit ................................................................. 18 PS Bits .................................................................. 18, 52 PSA Bit.................................................................. 18, 52 RBPU Bit..................................................................... 18 T0CS Bit................................................................ 18, 51 T0SE Bit................................................................ 18, 51 Oscillator Configuration..................................................... 119 CLKOUT ................................................................... 120 Dual Speed Operation for INTRC Modes.................. 120 EC ..................................................................... 119, 123 ER ............................................................................. 119 HS ..................................................................... 119, 123 INTRC ............................................................... 119, 123 LP...................................................................... 119, 123 XT ..................................................................... 119, 123 Oscillator, WDT ................................................................. 129 Oscillators RC, Block Diagram ................................................... 120 OTP Program Memory Read .............................................. 49 P Package Marking Information ........................................... 169 Paging, Program Memory ................................................... 23 PCON Register ................................................................. 123 BOR Bit ....................................................................... 22 OSCF Bit..................................................................... 22 POR Bit ....................................................................... 22 WDTON Bit ................................................................. 22 PICDEM 1 Low Cost PIC MCU Demonstration Board ........................................................ 143 PICDEM 17 Demonstration Board .................................... 144 PICDEM 2 Low Cost PIC16CXX Demonstration Board ........................................................ 143 PICDEM 3 Low Cost PIC16CXXX Demonstration Board ........................................................ 144 PICSTART Plus Entry Level Development Programmer ................................................ 143 Pin Functions AVDD ............................................................................. 9 AVSS .............................................................................. 9 RA0/AN0/OPA+............................................................. 8 RA1/AN1/OPA- ............................................................. 8 RA2/AN2/VREF2 ............................................................ 8 RA3/AN3/VREF1 ............................................................ 8 RA4/T0CKI.................................................................... 8 RA5/MCLR/VPP............................................................. 8 RA6/OSC2/CLKOUT/T1CKI ......................................... 8 RA7/OSC1/CLKIN......................................................... 8 RB0/INT/AN4/VR ........................................................... 8 RB1/AN5/VDAC ............................................................. 8 RB2/AN6 ....................................................................... 8 RB3/AN7/OPA............................................................... 8 RB4 ............................................................................... 8 RB5 ............................................................................... 8 RB6/C1/PSMC1A.......................................................... 8 RB7/C2/PSMC1B/T1G.................................................. 9 VDD ............................................................................... 9 VSS ................................................................................ 9 Pinout Description PIC16C781/782 ............................................................ 8  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIR1 Register ADIF Bit ...................................................................... 21 C1IF Bit....................................................................... 21 C2IF Bit....................................................................... 21 LVDIF Bit .................................................................... 21 TMR1IF Bit ................................................................. 21 PLVD DC Characteristics.................................................... 163 PLVD Example ................................................................... 67 PMCON1 ............................................................................ 47 PMDATH and PMDATL Registers...................................... 47 PMR Associated Register Summary ................................... 50 Pointer, FSR ....................................................................... 23 POR. See Power-on Reset PORTA Associated Register Summary ................................... 34 Initialization................................................................. 26 PORTA and the TRISA Register ........................................ 26 PORTB Associated Register Summary ................................... 45 Initialization................................................................. 35 Pull-up Enable (RBPU Bit).......................................... 18 RB0/INT Edge Select (INTEDG Bit) ........................... 18 RB0/INT Pin, External .............................................. 128 RB7:RB0 Interrupt-on-Change Enable (RBIE Bit).................................................................. 129 RB7:RB4 Interrupt-on-Change ................................. 129 RB7:RB4 Interrupt-on-Change Flag (RBIF Bit).................................................................. 129 PORTB and the TRISB Register ........................................ 35 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change .............................................. 35 PORTB Weak Pull-up ......................................................... 35 Postscaler, WDT................................................................. 52 Assignment (PSA Bit) ........................................... 18, 52 Rate Select (PS Bits)............................................ 18, 52 Switching Between Timer0 and WDT ......................... 52 Power-down Mode. See SLEEP Power-on Reset (POR)..................... 117, 121, 122, 125, 126 Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................ 117 Power Control (PCON) Register............................... 123 Power-down (PD Bit) .................................................. 17 Power-on Reset Circuit, External ............................. 122 Power-up Timer (PWRT) .................................. 117, 122 Time-out (TO Bit) ........................................................ 17 Time-out Sequence .................................................. 122 Time-out Sequence on Power-up ..................... 125, 127 Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................... 52 Assignment (PSA Bit) ........................................... 18, 52 Rate Select (PS Bits)............................................ 18, 52 Switching Between Timer0 and WDT ......................... 52 Prescaler, Timer1 Select (T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 Bits) .............................. 57 PRO MATE II Universal Device Programmer ................... 143 Program .............................................................................. 47 Program Counter PCL Register .............................................................. 23 PCLATH Register ............................................... 23, 129 Reset Conditions ...................................................... 125 Program Memory Paging ........................................................................ 23 Program Memory Map and Stack PIC16C781 ................................................................. 11 PIC16C782 ................................................................. 11 Program Memory Organization........................................... 11 Preliminary DS41171B-page 177 PIC16C781.book Page 178 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 Program Memory Read (PMR) ........................................... 47 Program Memory Read Cycle Execution ............................ 50 Programmable Brown-out Reset (PBOR) ................. 121, 122 Programmable Low Voltage Detect Module (PLVD).................................................................... 63 Control Register .......................................................... 63 Effects of a RESET ..................................................... 67 Operation .................................................................... 64 Operation During SLEEP ............................................ 67 Programmable Switch Mode Controller (PSMC)................. 99 Programming C1 for PSMC Feedback................................ 96 Programming, Device Instructions .................................... 133 PSMC Associated Registers ................................................ 115 Configuration............................................................. 107 Control Registers ...................................................... 104 Effects of SLEEP and RESET................................... 115 PSMC1A Operation in PSM Mode Using C1 Comparator Only ......................................................... 102 PSMC1A Output Sequence in PSM Mode Using C1 and C2 Comparators ......................................... 103 PSMC1A Output Sequence in PWM Mode Using C1 and C2 Comparators ......................................... 101 PSMC1A Output Sequence in PWM Mode Using C1 Comparator Only ............................................... 100 PSMCCON0 Register ....................................................... 104 PSMCCON1 Register ....................................................... 104 Pulse Skip Modulation (PSM) ........................................... 102 Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) .......................................... 99 R Read with Code Protect Set................................................ 50 Reading the EPROM Program Memory.............................. 49 Registers ADC Control Register (ADCON1) ............................... 71 ADC Control Register 0 (ADCON0) ............................ 70 ADC Result Register (ADRES) ................................... 71 Analog Select .............................................................. 25 Calibration Control Register (CALCON) ..................... 85 Comparator C1 Control Register0 (CM1CON0) ................................................................ 91 Comparator C2 Control Register0 (CM2CON0) ................................................................ 93 Comparator C2 Control Register1 (CM2CON1) ................................................................ 94 Digital-to-Analog Converter Control Register0 (DACON)..................................................................... 79 Digital-to-Analog Converter Register (DAC) ............... 79 INTCON ...................................................................... 19 Interrupt-on-Change PORTB ...................................... 36 OPAMP Control Register (OPACON).......................... 84 OPTION_REG ............................................................ 18 PCON.......................................................................... 22 PIE1 ............................................................................ 20 Program memory Address High (PMADRH)............... 48 Program Memory Address Low (PMADRL) ................ 48 Program memory Data High (PMDATH) ..................... 47 Program Memory Data Low (PMDATL) ...................... 48 Program Memory Read Control Register 1 (PMCON1) .................................................................. 47 Programmable Low Voltage Detect Register (LVDCON) ................................................................... 66 PSMC Control Register0 (PSMCCON0) ................... 105 PSMC Control Register1 (PSMCCON1) ................... 106 STATUS ...................................................................... 17 DS41171B-page 178 Timer1 Control Register (T1CON) .............................. 57 Voltage Reference Control Register (REFCON)......... 61 Weak Pull-up PORTB ................................................. 36 Registers Associated with VR............................................. 61 Registers/Bits Associated with ADC ................................... 77 Reset ................................................................................ 121 Brown-out Reset (BOR). See Brown-out Reset (BOR) Power-on Reset (POR). See Power-on Reset (POR) Reset Conditions for PCON Register ....................... 125 Reset Conditions for Program Counter..................... 125 Reset Conditions for STATUS Register .................... 125 WDT Reset. See Watchdog Timer (WDT) S Setting up the PLVD Module .............................................. 65 Single or Dual Output ....................................................... 103 SLEEP .............................................................. 117, 121, 131 Slope Compensation ........................................................ 103 Slope Compensation (SC) Switch Operation.................... 103 Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) .................................... 142 Special Features of the CPU ............................................ 117 Special Function Registers ................................................. 13 ADCON0 Register ...................................................... 13 ADCON1 Register ...................................................... 14 ADRES Register......................................................... 13 ANSEL Register.......................................................... 14 CALCON Register ...................................................... 15 CM1CON0 Register.................................................... 15 CM2CON0 Register.................................................... 15 CM2CON1 Register.................................................... 15 DAC Register.............................................................. 15 DACON0 Register ...................................................... 15 FSR Register .................................................. 13, 14, 16 INDF Register ........................................... 13, 14, 15, 16 INTCON Register...................................... 13, 14, 15, 16 IOCB Register............................................................. 14 LVDCON Register....................................................... 14 OPACON Register ...................................................... 15 OPTION_REG Register........................................ 14, 16 PCL Register ............................................ 13, 14, 15, 16 PCLATH Register ..................................... 13, 14, 15, 16 PCON Register........................................................... 14 PIE1 Register ............................................................. 14 PIR1 Register ............................................................. 13 PMADRH Register...................................................... 15 PMADRL Register ...................................................... 15 PMCON1 Register...................................................... 16 PMDATH Register ...................................................... 15 PMDATL Register ....................................................... 15 PORTA Register ......................................................... 13 PORTB Register ................................................... 13, 15 PSMCCON0 Register ................................................. 15 PSMCCON1 Register ................................................. 15 REFCON Register ...................................................... 14 STATUS Register...................................... 13, 14, 15, 16 Summary .................................................................... 13 T1CON Register ......................................................... 13 TMR0 Register...................................................... 13, 15 TMR1H Register......................................................... 13 TMR1L Register.......................................................... 13 TRISA Register........................................................... 14 TRISB Register..................................................... 14, 16 WPUB Register........................................................... 14 Stack................................................................................... 23 STATUS Register ............................................................. 129 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 179 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 C Bit ............................................................................ 17 DC Bit.......................................................................... 17 IRP Bit......................................................................... 17 PD Bit.......................................................................... 17 RP Bits ........................................................................ 17 TO Bit.......................................................................... 17 Zero Bit ....................................................................... 17 T T1CON Register T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0 Bits ............................................ 57 T1OSCEN Bit.............................................................. 57 TMR1CS Bit ................................................................ 57 TMR1ON Bit................................................................ 57 TAD vs. Device Operating Frequencies............................... 72 Timer0 ................................................................................. 51 Associated Registers .................................................. 53 Clock Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit)......................... 51 Clock Source Select (T0CS Bit)............................ 18, 51 Overflow Flag (T0IF Bit)............................................ 129 Overflow Interrupt ............................................... 52, 129 Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0 Timer0 Module .................................................................... 51 Timer0 Operation ................................................................ 51 Timer1 Associated Registers Summary.................................. 59 Clock Source Select (TMR1CS Bit) ............................ 57 Effects of a RESET ..................................................... 59 Module On/Off (TMR1ON Bit)..................................... 57 Oscillator Enable (T1OSCEN Bit) ............................... 57 Timer1 Incrementing Edge.................................................. 58 Timer1 Initialization ............................................................. 55 Timer1 Interrupt .................................................................. 59 Timer1 Module Timer/Counter ............................................ 55 Timer1 Module with Gate Control ....................................... 55 Timer1 Operation ................................................................ 55 Timer1 Oscillator for the PIC16C781/782 ........................... 59 Timing Diagrams ADC Conversion ....................................................... 165 Brown-out Reset ....................................................... 154 CLKOUT and I/O....................................................... 152 External Clock........................................................... 153 External Clock Timing ............................................... 152 RESET, Watchdog Timer, Oscillator Start-up Timer and Power-up Timer.................................................. 154 Time-out Sequence on Power-up ..................... 125, 127 Timer0 ....................................................................... 156 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock............................ 156 Timer1 ....................................................................... 156 Wake-up from SLEEP via Interrupt ........................... 132 TRISA, ANSEL, and Control Precedence ........................... 26 TRISB, ANSEL, and Control Precedence ........................... 36 Typical Low Voltage Detect Application .............................. 63  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. V Voltage Reference Module Effects of a RESET..................................................... 61 Voltage Reference Module (VR)......................................... 61 W W Register ........................................................................ 129 Wake-up from SLEEP............................................... 117, 131 Interrupts .......................................................... 125, 126 MCLR Reset ............................................................. 126 Timing Diagram ........................................................ 132 WDT Reset ............................................................... 126 Watchdog Timer Associated Register Summary ................................. 130 Watchdog Timer (WDT)............................................ 117, 129 Enable (WDTE Bit) ................................................... 129 Postscaler. See Postscaler, WDT Programming Considerations ................................... 129 RC Oscillator ............................................................ 129 Time-out Period ........................................................ 129 WDT Reset, Normal Operation................. 121, 125, 126 WDT Reset, SLEEP ......................................... 125, 126 Window Comparator with Interrupt ..................................... 96 WWW, On-Line Support ....................................................... 3 Preliminary DS41171B-page 179 PIC16C781.book Page 180 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 180 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 181 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE CUSTOMER SUPPORT Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software • General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing • Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Customers should contact their distributor, representative or field application engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://microchip.com/support CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION SERVICE Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at www.microchip.com. Under “Support”, click on “Customer Change Notification” and follow the registration instructions.  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41171B-page 181 PIC16C781.book Page 182 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM READER RESPONSE It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150. Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document. TO: Technical Publications Manager RE: Reader Response Total Pages Sent ________ From: Name Company Address City / State / ZIP / Country Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________ FAX: (______) _________ - _________ Application (optional): Would you like a reply? Y N Device: Literature Number: DS41171B Questions: 1. What are the best features of this document? 2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs? 3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why? 4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject? 5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness? 6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)? 7. How would you improve this document? DS41171B-page 182  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 183 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 PIC16C781/782 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. Device Device X Temperature Range /XX XXX Package Pattern PIC16C781: VDD range 4.0V-5.5V PIC16C781T: VDD range 4.0V-5.5V (Tape and Reel) PIC16LC781: VDD range 2.7V-5.5V PIC16LC781T: VDD range 2.7V-5.5V (Tape and Reel) Temperature Range I = -40C to +85C Package SO SS P JW Pattern QTP, SQTP, ROM Code (factory specified) or Special Requirements . Blank for OTP and Windowed devices. = = = = Examples: a) PIC16C781-I/P Industrial Temp., Plastic DIP package, normal VDD limits b) PIC16LC781-I/SS Industrial Temp., SSOP package, extended VDD limits c) PIC16C781-I/SOT Industrial Temp., SOIC package, Tape and Reel, normal VDD limits SOIC SSOP PDIP Windowed CERDIP * JW Devices are UV erasable and can be programmed to any device configuration. JW Devices meet the electrical requirement of each oscillator type. Sales and Support Data Sheets Products supported by a preliminary Data Sheet may have an errata sheet describing minor operational differences and recommended workarounds. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please contact one of the following: 1. 2. Your local Microchip sales office The Microchip Worldwide Site (www.microchip.com)  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 183 PIC16C781.book Page 184 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES: DS41171B-page 184 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 185 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 NOTES:  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Preliminary DS41171B-page 185 PIC16C781.book Page 186 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM PIC16C781/782 DS41171B-page 186 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. PIC16C781.book Page 187 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, dsPIC, FlashFlex, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, rfPIC, SST, SST Logo, SuperFlash and UNI/O are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. FilterLab, Hampshire, HI-TECH C, Linear Active Thermistor, MTP, SEEVAL and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Silicon Storage Technology is a registered trademark of Microchip Technology Inc. in other countries. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, BodyCom, chipKIT, chipKIT logo, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, dsSPEAK, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, HI-TIDE, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPF, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, mTouch, Omniscient Code Generation, PICC, PICC-18, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, REAL ICE, rfLAB, Select Mode, SQI, Serial Quad I/O, Total Endurance, TSHARC, UniWinDriver, WiperLock, ZENA and Z-Scale are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. GestIC and ULPP are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Germany II GmbH & Co. & KG, a subsidiary of Microchip Technology Inc., in other countries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2001-2013, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. ISBN: 9781620769706 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM CERTIFIED BY DNV == ISO/TS 16949 ==  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2009 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. Preliminary DS41171B-page 187 PIC16C781.book Page 188 Tuesday, January 29, 2013 3:29 PM Worldwide Sales and Service AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://www.microchip.com/ support Web Address: www.microchip.com Asia Pacific Office Suites 3707-14, 37th Floor Tower 6, The Gateway Harbour City, Kowloon Hong Kong Tel: 852-2401-1200 Fax: 852-2401-3431 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 Fax: 91-80-3090-4123 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 Fax: 91-11-4160-8632 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-2566-1512 Fax: 91-20-2566-1513 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Japan - Osaka Tel: 81-6-6152-7160 Fax: 81-6-6152-9310 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Cleveland Independence, OH Tel: 216-447-0464 Fax: 216-447-0643 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Farmington Hills, MI Tel: 248-538-2250 Fax: 248-538-2260 Indianapolis Noblesville, IN Tel: 317-773-8323 Fax: 317-773-5453 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Santa Clara Santa Clara, CA Tel: 408-961-6444 Fax: 408-961-6445 Toronto Mississauga, Ontario, Canada Tel: 905-673-0699 Fax: 905-673-6509 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 Fax: 61-2-9868-6755 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8569-7000 Fax: 86-10-8528-2104 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Fax: 82-53-744-4302 China - Chongqing Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 Fax: 86-23-8980-9500 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 China - Hangzhou Tel: 86-571-2819-3187 Fax: 86-571-2819-3189 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or 82-2-558-5934 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2943-5100 Fax: 852-2401-3431 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-6201-9857 Fax: 60-3-6201-9859 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 Fax: 86-25-8473-2470 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Fax: 60-4-227-4068 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 Fax: 86-532-8502-7205 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Fax: 63-2-634-9069 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-5407-5533 Fax: 86-21-5407-5066 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Fax: 65-6334-8850 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 Fax: 86-24-2334-2393 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-5778-366 Fax: 886-3-5770-955 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8864-2200 Fax: 86-755-8203-1760 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-213-7828 Fax: 886-7-330-9305 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 Fax: 86-27-5980-5118 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2508-8600 Fax: 886-2-2508-0102 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 Fax: 86-29-8833-7256 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Fax: 66-2-694-1350 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5869 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 Fax: 86-592-2388130 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 Fax: 86-756-3210049 DS41171B-page 188 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Japan - Tokyo Tel: 81-3-6880- 3770 Fax: 81-3-6880-3771 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 Fax: 86-28-8665-7889 11/29/12 Preliminary  2001-2013 Microchip Technology Inc.